[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2023190433A1 - Management system and management method - Google Patents

Management system and management method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023190433A1
WO2023190433A1 PCT/JP2023/012370 JP2023012370W WO2023190433A1 WO 2023190433 A1 WO2023190433 A1 WO 2023190433A1 JP 2023012370 W JP2023012370 W JP 2023012370W WO 2023190433 A1 WO2023190433 A1 WO 2023190433A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
maintenance
information
unit
mobile
mobile object
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/012370
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
杉野千咲子
友谷浩之
Original Assignee
本田技研工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 本田技研工業株式会社 filed Critical 本田技研工業株式会社
Priority to JP2024512509A priority Critical patent/JPWO2023190433A1/ja
Publication of WO2023190433A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023190433A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00—Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/20—Administration of product repair or maintenance

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a management system and a management method.
  • JP 2016-12291 A includes a plurality of bicycles for sharing, a plurality of bicycle parking areas where a predetermined number of bicycles can be parked, and a management device installed in each bicycle parking area.
  • a mobile sharing system is disclosed.
  • the present invention aims to solve the above-mentioned problems.
  • a management system is a management system that manages mobile objects shared by users, and includes a setting unit that sets a management area, and a base that provides maintenance work for the mobile object.
  • a determining unit is provided that determines the positions of the service bases so that the service bases are approximately evenly arranged within the management area.
  • a management method is a management method for managing a mobile body shared by users, which includes the steps of setting a management area and a base for providing maintenance work for the mobile body. determining the positions of the service bases so that the service bases are approximately evenly distributed within the management area.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an example management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile object.
  • FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile terminal.
  • FIG. 2C is a block diagram illustrating an example of a terminal device.
  • FIG. 2D is a block diagram illustrating an example of a management device.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a sharing system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an example of a mobile communication terminal.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service locations.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service locations.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service locations.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a management system according to this embodiment.
  • FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile object.
  • FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile terminal.
  • FIG. 2C is a block diagram illustrating an example of a terminal device.
  • FIG. 2D is a block diagram illustrating an example of a management device.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a sharing system according to this embodiment.
  • the management system 10 may include a mobile terminal 200, a terminal device 300, and a management device 400, but is not limited thereto.
  • the management system 10 manages a mobile object 100 shared by multiple users.
  • the management system 10 can manage maintenance for the mobile object 100. Maintenance may include, but is not limited to, inspection, charging, cleaning, servicing, moving, etc. Charging includes, but is not limited to, battery replacement. Maintenance includes, but is not limited to, repairs, parts replacement, etc.
  • the mobile object 100, the mobile terminal 200, the terminal device 300, and the management device 400 can be connected to a network 24 such as the Internet.
  • the management system 10 manages a plurality of mobile bodies 100, and in FIG.
  • the management system 10 may include a plurality of mobile terminals 200, one mobile terminal 200 among the plurality of mobile terminals 200 is illustrated in FIG.
  • the management system 10 may include a plurality of terminal devices 300, one terminal device 300 among the plurality of terminal devices 300 is illustrated in FIG.
  • the mobile object 100 can be used in the sharing system 12.
  • the mobile object 100 can be lent to each user from an operator that operates the sharing system 12 according to this embodiment.
  • the mobile object 100 may be shared among multiple users.
  • the sharing system 12 includes a rental port (station, cycle port) 22.
  • the rental port 22 may be installed by an operator that operates the sharing system 12.
  • Multiple rental ports 22 may be provided at various locations throughout the city.
  • the rental port 22 may be provided near a railway station, near a main road, near a commercial facility, etc., but is not limited thereto.
  • a plurality of mobile objects 100 can be parked at each rental port 22.
  • a user can register for the sharing system 12.
  • User information which is information related to users, can be registered in the sharing system 12.
  • the user information may include user identification information that is identification information given to the user.
  • the user information may be stored in a user information storage unit 426 provided in the management device 400 and described later.
  • the user identification information stored in the management device 400 may also be referred to as registered identification information.
  • Users registered in the sharing system 12 can apply to use the mobile object 100. That is, the user can make a reservation for use of the mobile object 100. After applying for use of the mobile object 100, the user can go to the rental port 22 and receive the mobile object 100. After the user completes using the mobile object 100, the user can return the mobile object 100 to the rental port 22.
  • the rental port 22 to which the mobile object 100 is returned may be the rental port 22 that received the mobile object 100, or it may be a rental port 22 that is different from the rental port 22 that received the mobile object 100.
  • the sharing system 12 may include a management machine 30, but is not limited to this.
  • a management machine 30 may be provided at each rental port 22.
  • the management device 30 can manage the mobile object 100 placed at the rental port 22.
  • the management machine 30 may include a computer including a processor, memory, input/output interface, and the like. Moreover, the management machine 30 may further include a communication module.
  • the management machine 30 can be connected to a network 24 such as the Internet.
  • the management machine 30 can control the operation of the port lock mechanism 38. When renting out the mobile object 100, the management machine 30 can unlock the port lock mechanism 38 that has locked the mobile object 100 for a predetermined period of time. Further, when the mobile body 100 is returned, the management machine 30 can lock the mobile body 100 by controlling the port lock mechanism 38.
  • the management machine 30 can acquire mobile object information that is information supplied from the mobile object 100 located at the rental port 22.
  • Such mobile body information may include mobile body identification information that is identification information of the mobile body 100.
  • the mobile object information may include the remaining capacity (remaining battery amount) of the battery 108 provided in the mobile object 100, and the like.
  • the management device 30 can transmit the acquired mobile object information to the management device 400.
  • the mobile object 100 can be shared by multiple users. Examples of the mobile object 100 include, but are not limited to, an electric bicycle.
  • the mobile body 100 includes a calculation unit 102, a storage unit 104, a positioning unit 105, a lock mechanism 106, a battery 108, an information presentation unit 110, an inter-mobile body communication unit 111, A communication unit 112 may be provided.
  • the mobile body 100 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here.
  • a program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance in the mobile body 100.
  • the calculation unit 102 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit). That is, the calculation unit 102 may be configured by a processing circuit.
  • a processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit). That is, the calculation unit 102 may be configured by a processing circuit.
  • the calculation unit 102 includes a control unit 114, a usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, a usage restriction unit 118, a reservation transfer unit 122, a location information acquisition unit 124, an authentication unit 126, and a data acquisition unit 128. It can be done.
  • the control unit 114 is in charge of overall control of the mobile body 100.
  • the control unit 114, the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, the usage restriction unit 118, the reservation transfer unit 122, the location information acquisition unit 124, the authentication unit 126, and the data acquisition unit 128 are stored in the storage unit 104. This can be realized by executing a program by the arithmetic unit 102.
  • control unit 114 usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, usage restriction unit 118, reservation transfer unit 122, location information acquisition unit 124, authentication unit 126, and data acquisition unit 128 is an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit). , an integrated circuit such as an FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array). Further, at least a part of the control unit 114, usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, usage restriction unit 118, reservation transfer unit 122, location information acquisition unit 124, authentication unit 126, and data acquisition unit 128 is implemented by an electronic circuit including a discrete device. may be configured.
  • the storage unit 104 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of the volatile memory include RAM (Random Access Memory). Examples of the nonvolatile memory include ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 104 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
  • the positioning unit 105 may be equipped with a GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) sensor.
  • the GNSS sensor can obtain position information indicating the current position of the mobile object 100 using a satellite positioning system.
  • the position information acquired by the positioning unit 105 may be supplied to a position information acquisition unit 124, which will be described later.
  • the position information acquisition unit 124 can acquire position information supplied from the positioning unit 105.
  • the location information acquisition unit 124 can supply the location information supplied from the positioning unit 105 to the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 112.
  • the locking mechanism 106 can lock and unlock the moving body 100.
  • the lock mechanism 106 can restrict rotation of the wheels provided on the moving body 100.
  • the lock mechanism 106 can allow the wheels to rotate.
  • the lock mechanism 106 can be controlled by a use restriction unit 118, which will be described later.
  • the mobile object 100 can perform assisted travel or the like by driving a drive source (not shown) using electric power supplied from the battery 108 or the like.
  • the battery 108 can be provided by a business that provides the sharing system 12, but is not limited thereto. Replacement of the battery 108, etc. may be performed by a maintenance member or the like, which will be described later, but is not limited thereto.
  • the mobile object 100 may be equipped with the information presentation section 110.
  • the information presentation unit 110 can be read by the mobile terminal 200, the terminal device 300, etc.
  • the information presenting unit 110 can present information. More specifically, the information presentation section 110 can present identification information for identifying the mobile object 100 equipped with the information presentation section 110.
  • the mobile object 100 can be identified based on the identification information presented by the information presenting section 110.
  • the information presentation unit 110 may be included in the body of the mobile object 100, for example, but is not limited thereto.
  • the information presentation unit 110 may be included in a component included in the moving body 100.
  • the information presentation unit 110 may be configured by a sticker or the like, but is not limited to this.
  • the information presentation section 110 may be printed on the body of the moving object 100 or the like. Furthermore, the information presentation section 110 may be printed on a component or the like provided in the moving body 100.
  • the presentation information which is the information presented by the information presentation unit 110, may include, for example, the management number of the mobile object 100.
  • the information presentation unit 110 may include character information indicating the management number of the mobile object 100.
  • the information presentation unit 110 may be equipped with, for example, a QR code (registered trademark). Such a QR code (registered trademark) can be read by the mobile terminal 200, the terminal device 300, etc.
  • the communication unit 112 can perform wireless communication and the like.
  • the communication unit 112 can perform wireless communication via the base station (relay station) 23 and the network 24.
  • the mobile body 100 can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 112 provided in the mobile body 100 and the network 24.
  • the communication unit 112 can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 112 can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like.
  • the communication unit 112 may include a short-range wireless communication module (not shown).
  • As the short-range wireless communication module for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be possessed by a user who uses the sharing system 12.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be a portable electronic device. Examples of such portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, smartphones.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be a tablet terminal, a wearable terminal, or the like.
  • Application software for using the sharing system 12 may be installed on the mobile terminal 200.
  • the mobile terminal 200 includes a calculation section 202, a storage section 204, a positioning section 205, an imaging section 206, an operation section 208, a display section 210, and a communication section 212. obtain. Furthermore, the mobile terminal 200 may further include a speaker (not shown), a microphone (not shown), and the like. Note that the mobile terminal 200 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here. As described later, a program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance on the mobile terminal 200.
  • the calculation unit 202 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU or GPU, for example. That is, the calculation unit 202 may be configured by a processing circuit.
  • the calculation unit 202 includes a control unit 214, a reception unit 216, a usage restriction information provision unit 218, a maintenance required mobile object information provision unit 220, a maintenance required information provision unit 222, an image acquisition unit 224, and a malfunction content information provision unit 224.
  • a determination section 225, a display control section 226, a determination section 227, and an information provision section 228 may be provided.
  • Control unit 214 manages overall control of mobile terminal 200.
  • the display control unit 226 controls the screen display of the display unit 210.
  • the control unit 226, the determination unit 227, and the information providing unit 228 can be realized by the calculation unit 202 executing a program stored in the storage unit 204.
  • At least a portion of the section 227 and the information providing section 228 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as an ASIC or an FPGA.
  • control unit 214, reception unit 216, usage restriction information provision unit 218, maintenance required mobile object information provision unit 220, maintenance required information provision unit 222, image acquisition unit 224, defect content determination unit 225, display control unit 226, determination At least a portion of the section 227 and the information providing section 228 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
  • the storage unit 204 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 204 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
  • the positioning unit 205 may be equipped with a GNSS sensor.
  • the GNSS sensor can obtain position information indicating the current position of the mobile terminal 200 using a satellite positioning system.
  • the position information acquired by the positioning unit 205 may be supplied to the control unit 214.
  • the control unit 214 can supply the position information supplied from the positioning unit 205 to the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 212.
  • the imaging unit 206 ie, the camera, can perform imaging.
  • the operation unit 208 can be used by a user of the mobile terminal 200 to operate the mobile terminal 200.
  • the display section 210 is equipped with a display element (not shown).
  • a display element for example, a liquid crystal display element, an organic electroluminescence display element, etc. can be used.
  • the operation unit 208 and the display unit 210 may be configured by a touch panel (not shown) including such a display element.
  • the communication unit 212 can perform wireless communication and the like.
  • the communication unit 212 can perform wireless communication via the base station 23 and the network 24.
  • the mobile terminal 200 can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 212 provided in the mobile terminal 200 and the network 24.
  • the communication unit 212 can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 212 can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like.
  • the communication unit 212 may include a short-range wireless communication module (not shown).
  • As the short-range wireless communication module for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the terminal device 300 may be owned by a maintenance member who provides maintenance work.
  • the terminal device 300 may be, for example, a portable electronic device. Examples of such portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, smartphones.
  • the terminal device 300 may be a tablet terminal, a wearable terminal, or the like.
  • Application software for maintenance members may be installed on the terminal device 300.
  • the terminal device 300 includes a calculation section 302, a storage section 304, an imaging section 306, an operation section 308, a display section 310, a positioning section 311, and a communication section 312. obtain. Furthermore, the terminal device 300 may further include a speaker (not shown), a microphone (not shown), and the like. Note that the terminal device 300 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here. As will be described later, a program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance in the terminal device 300.
  • the calculation unit 302 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU or GPU, for example. That is, the calculation unit 302 may be configured by a processing circuit.
  • the calculation unit 302 includes a control unit 314, a reception unit 315, a remuneration information input reception unit 316, an input reception unit 317, a completion information reception unit 318, a commissioned information supply unit 320, an image acquisition unit 322, An audio information providing section 324, a providing section 326, a maintenance record providing section 328, a position information obtaining section 329, a display control section 330, and an availability determining section 331 may be provided.
  • the control unit 314 is in charge of overall control of the terminal device 300.
  • the display control unit 330 controls the screen display of the display unit 310.
  • the providing unit 326 , the maintenance record providing unit 328 , the position information acquiring unit 329 , the display control unit 330 , and the availability determining unit 331 are configured such that the program stored in the storage unit 304 is executed by the calculation unit 302 This can be achieved by
  • At least a portion of the record providing section 328, the position information acquisition section 329, the display control section 330, and the availability determination section 331 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as ASIC or FPGA.
  • control unit 314, the reception unit 315, the remuneration information input reception unit 316, the input reception unit 317, the completion information reception unit 318, the commissioned information supply unit 320, the image acquisition unit 322, the audio information provision unit 324, the provision unit 326, and the maintenance At least a portion of the record providing section 328, the position information acquisition section 329, the display control section 330, and the availability determination section 331 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
  • the storage unit 304 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 304 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
  • the imaging unit 306, ie, the camera, can perform imaging.
  • the operation unit 308 can be used by a user of the terminal device 300 to operate the terminal device 300.
  • the display section 310 is equipped with a display element (not shown).
  • a display element for example, a liquid crystal display element, an organic electroluminescence display element, etc. can be used.
  • the operation unit 308 and the display unit 310 may be configured by a touch panel (not shown) including such a display element.
  • the positioning unit 311 may be equipped with a GNSS sensor.
  • the GNSS sensor acquires position information indicating the current position of the terminal device 300 using a satellite positioning system.
  • the position information acquired by the positioning unit 311 is supplied to a position information acquisition unit 329, which will be described later.
  • the position information acquisition unit 329 can acquire position information supplied from the positioning unit 311.
  • the position information acquisition unit 329 can supply the position information supplied from the positioning unit 311 to the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 312.
  • the management device 400 can store location information indicating the current location of the terminal device 300 in a maintenance member information storage unit 432, which will be described later.
  • the communication unit 312 can perform wireless communication and the like.
  • the communication unit 312 can perform wireless communication via the base station 23 and the network 24.
  • the terminal device 300 can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 312 provided in the terminal device 300 and the network 24.
  • the communication unit 312 can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 312 can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like.
  • the communication unit 312 may include a short-range wireless communication module (not shown).
  • As the short-range wireless communication module for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the management device (management server) 400 may be installed in the management center 29 of the operator that operates the management system 10, but is not limited thereto. As shown in FIG. 2D, the management device 400 may include a calculation section 402, a storage section 404, and a communication section 406. Note that the management device 400 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here. At least a part of the management device 400 may be configured by another server provided outside the management center 29. A program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance in the storage unit 404.
  • the calculation unit 402 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU or GPU, for example. That is, the calculation unit 402 may be configured by a processing circuit.
  • the calculation unit 402 includes a control unit 408 , a reservation reception unit 410 , an estimation unit 412 , a maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 , a determination unit 416 , a moving object determination unit 417 , a notification unit 418 , and a selection unit 420 , a member evaluation section 422 , a processing section 423 , a working state suitability determination section 424 , and a position/posture suitability determination section 425 .
  • the calculation unit 402 includes a setting unit 440, a determination unit 442, a correction unit 444, an incentive provision unit 445, an acquisition unit 446, a work evaluation unit 448, a work standard generation unit 450, and a remuneration determination unit 451.
  • the control unit 408 is in charge of overall control of the management device 400.
  • Control unit 408, Reservation reception unit 410, Estimation unit 412, Maintenance required information distribution unit 414, Determination unit 416, Mobile body determination unit 417, Notification unit 418, Selection unit 420, Member evaluation unit 422 , the processing unit 423 , the working state suitability determination unit 424 , and the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 can be realized by the calculation unit 402 executing a program stored in the storage unit 404 .
  • Setting unit 440, determining unit 442, correction unit 444, incentive providing unit 445, acquiring unit 446, work evaluation unit 448, work standard generation unit 450, remuneration determination unit 451, and work standard information provision unit 452 , consideration determination section 454 , and information provider evaluation section 456 can be realized by execution of a program stored in storage section 404 by calculation section 402 .
  • At least a portion of the state suitability determination section 424 and the position/orientation suitability determination section 425 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as an ASIC or an FPGA.
  • a setting unit 440, a determining unit 442, a correction unit 444, an incentive providing unit 445, an acquiring unit 446, a work evaluation unit 448, a work standard generation unit 450, a remuneration determination unit 451, a work standard information provision unit 452, a consideration determination unit 454 , at least a part of the information provider evaluation unit 456 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as an ASIC or an FPGA.
  • At least a portion of the state suitability determination unit 424 and the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
  • Setting unit 440, determining unit 442, correction unit 444, incentive providing unit 445, acquiring unit 446, work evaluation unit 448, work standard generation unit 450, remuneration determination unit 451, work standard information provision unit 452, consideration determination unit 454, information At least a portion of the provider evaluation unit 456 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
  • the storage unit 404 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 404 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above. Furthermore, the storage unit 404 may further include an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), an SSD (Solid State Drive), and the like.
  • HDD Hard Disk Drive
  • SSD Solid State Drive
  • the storage unit 404 includes a user information storage unit 426, a moving object information storage unit 428, a reservation information storage unit 430, a maintenance member information storage unit 432, a work information storage unit 433, a maintenance history storage unit 434, A usage history storage section 436 and a map information storage section 438 may be provided.
  • the user information storage unit 426 may store user information that is information related to users.
  • the user information may include information regarding the user's name. Further, the user information may include information regarding the user's contact information. Contact information may include address, phone number, email address, etc.
  • the user information may include user identification information that is identification information given to the user. Furthermore, as described above, the user identification information stored in the user information storage section 426 may also be referred to as registered identification information.
  • the user information may include information regarding maintenance work that the user can perform. Further, the user information may include information regarding the user's rating. Further, the user information may include information regarding the usage history of the mobile object 100 by the user. Further, the user information may include information regarding the characteristics of the user.
  • the information regarding the user's characteristics may include information regarding the user's driving characteristics. Driving characteristics may include aggressive driving and the like. Note that the user information is not limited to these.
  • the mobile body information storage unit 428 may store mobile body information that is information regarding each mobile body 100.
  • the moving object information may include information indicating the vehicle type of the moving object 100 and the like.
  • the mobile object information may include information indicating the date of purchase of the mobile object 100 and the like.
  • the moving object information may include information indicating parts and the like attached to the moving object 100.
  • the mobile object information may include information indicating options and the like provided to the mobile object 100.
  • the mobile body information may include mobile body identification information that is identification information of the mobile body 100.
  • the mobile body identification information may include, for example, the management number of the mobile body 100.
  • the mobile object information may include information indicating the position of the mobile object 100.
  • the mobile object information may include information indicating whether the mobile object 100 corresponds to the maintenance required mobile object 100A (see FIG. 3), which is a mobile object 100 that requires maintenance work.
  • the information indicating this is stored in the moving object information memory. 428.
  • the estimation unit 412 included in the management device 400 estimates that the mobile object 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile object 100A, information indicating this is stored in the mobile object information storage unit 428. obtain.
  • the mobile object information may include problem content information (defect information) indicating the details of the problem occurring in the mobile object 100. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include information indicating the date and time when the defect content information was obtained. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include information indicating a history of problems that have occurred in the mobile object 100.
  • the mobile object information may include the remaining capacity (remaining battery amount) of the battery 108 provided in the mobile object 100.
  • the mobile object information may include rental port information that is information regarding the rental port 22 in which the mobile object 100 is placed.
  • the rental port information may include the name, management number (identification number), etc. of the rental port 22.
  • the mobile object information may include the management number of the port lock mechanism 38 that locks the mobile object 100, and the like.
  • the moving object information may include information indicating parts and the like attached to the moving object 100. Note that the mobile information is not limited to these.
  • the reservation information storage unit 430 may store usage reservation information that is information regarding usage reservations for each mobile object 100.
  • the usage reservation information may include reservation information indicating that the mobile object 100 has been reserved. Further, the usage reservation information may include information indicating that the mobile object 100 is not reserved. That is, the usage reservation information may include availability information indicating that the mobile object 100 is an available mobile object 100B (see FIG. 3).
  • the reservation information storage unit 430 may store usage reservation restriction information, which is information for restricting usage reservations for each mobile object 100.
  • the usage reservation restriction information may include usage reservation cancellation information that is information indicating cancellation of the usage reservation of the mobile object 100. Further, the usage reservation restriction information may include usage reservation frequency restriction information, which is information for restricting the frequency of usage reservations for the mobile object 100. Further, the information for restricting usage reservations may include usage reservation priority information regarding the priority of usage reservations for the mobile object 100. Note that the usage reservation information is not limited to these.
  • Maintenance member information which is information related to maintenance members, can be registered in the maintenance member information storage unit 432.
  • the maintenance member provides maintenance work to the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • a vendor bicycle vendor
  • Various people who can perform maintenance on the mobile object 100 can be registered as maintenance members.
  • the maintenance member may be a natural person or a corporation.
  • the maintenance members may be business operators or non-business operators.
  • the maintenance members only need to be capable of handling at least one of multiple types of maintenance work. For example, even a person who can only perform inspections can be registered as a maintenance member.
  • the maintenance member information may include information regarding the name of the maintenance member. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information regarding the contact information of the maintenance member. Contact information may include address, phone number, email address, etc. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information regarding the location of the maintenance member. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information indicating whether the maintenance member's store is a fixed store or a mobile store.
  • the maintenance member information may include maintenance member identification information that is identification information given to the maintenance member.
  • Maintenance member identification information may also be referred to as registered member identification information.
  • the maintenance member information may include location information indicating the current location of the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member.
  • the maintenance member information may include available work information, which is information regarding maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle.
  • the maintenance member information may include information regarding the skills of the maintenance member.
  • Information regarding the skills of a maintenance member may be declared by the maintenance member, but is not limited thereto.
  • the skill of the maintenance member may be determined based on the results of maintenance work provided by the maintenance member.
  • the skills of the maintenance member may be determined based on the period until the same maintenance work that was performed on the one mobile object 100 is required again. Good too. Further, for example, based on the distance traveled by the one moving body 100 until the same one maintenance work as the one maintenance work performed on the one moving body 100 is required again, , the skills of the maintenance member may be determined.
  • the maintenance member information may include remuneration information that is information regarding remuneration (wage) when the maintenance member performs maintenance work. Such remuneration information may be set for each of a plurality of types of maintenance work that the maintenance member may provide, but is not limited thereto.
  • the remuneration for maintenance work may be calculated by multiplying the time required for the maintenance work by the wage per unit time of the maintenance member.
  • Information indicating the maintenance member's wage per unit time may be included in the remuneration information.
  • the wage per unit time of the maintenance member may be set based on the skill of the maintenance member.
  • the maintenance member information may include member evaluation information.
  • Member evaluation information is information indicating evaluations of maintenance members.
  • the member evaluation information may be generated by the member evaluation unit 422 based on work evaluation information, which will be described later, which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work performed by the maintenance member.
  • the maintenance member information may include information regarding the operating hours of the maintenance member. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information regarding remuneration of the maintenance member for various maintenance tasks. Note that maintenance member information is not limited to these.
  • the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating appropriate positions and postures of maintenance members when performing maintenance work, depending on the content of the maintenance work. Further, the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating an appropriate position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A when performing maintenance work, depending on the content of the maintenance work. Further, the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating appropriate positions and orientations of parts when performing maintenance work, depending on the content of the maintenance work. More specifically, the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating appropriate positions and orientations of parts when performing maintenance work, depending on the parts used in the maintenance work. In this way, the work information storage unit 433 stores appropriate position/posture information that is information indicating a suitable position/posture.
  • the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating storage locations of tools used during maintenance work. That is, a storage area is provided near the rental port 22 to store tools used during maintenance work.
  • the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating the storage location.
  • the maintenance history storage unit (maintenance history information storage unit, maintenance history database) 434 can store maintenance history (maintenance history information) for each mobile object 100.
  • the maintenance history may include information regarding the person who performed maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • Maintenance work may be performed by maintenance members.
  • the maintenance member can be registered in advance as a person who performs maintenance work on the maintenance required mobile body 100A (see FIG. 3), which is a mobile body that requires maintenance. Note that the maintenance work may be performed by someone other than the maintenance members.
  • the maintenance history may include information indicating the date and time of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance history may include information indicating the content of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance history may include information regarding parts (used parts) mounted on the moving body 100 during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may include information regarding the time required for maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may include information regarding remuneration for maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may also include matters related to the maintenance. Note that the maintenance history is not limited to these.
  • the usage history storage unit (usage history information storage unit, usage history database) 436 can store the usage history (usage history information) of each mobile object 100.
  • the usage history may include information regarding the user who used the mobile object 100. Further, the usage history may include information regarding the usage time, which is the time the mobile object 100 was used. Further, the usage history may include information regarding the travel distance (usage distance), which is the distance traveled by the mobile object 100. Further, the usage history may include travel data of the mobile object 100.
  • the travel data may include information regarding the route traveled by the mobile object 100 (route used). Further, the traveling data may include information regarding the traveling speed of the mobile object 100. Further, the traveling data may include information indicating the power load when the mobile object 100 is traveling.
  • the usage history may include the driving history. Note that the usage history and the driving history may be stored separately in the storage unit 404. Further, the usage history may include information indicating a user's request regarding maintenance of the mobile object 100. Note that the usage history is not limited to these.
  • Map information can be stored in the map information storage section 438.
  • the communication unit 406 includes, for example, a communication module (not shown).
  • the communication unit 406 can transmit and receive data via the network 24.
  • the management device 400 can function as a host machine for the sharing system 12.
  • the management device 400 can manage a plurality of registered users.
  • the management device 400 can manage a plurality of mobile objects 100.
  • the management device 400 can manage maintenance of a plurality of mobile objects 100.
  • the management device 400 may be realized by multiple computers working together.
  • the management device 400 notifies the user of information regarding the mobile object 100 that the user is scheduled to receive. Such information may include the name of the rental port 22 in which the mobile object 100 is placed, the management number of the port lock mechanism 38 that locks the mobile object 100, the management number of the mobile object 100, and the like.
  • the management device 400 supplies registration identification information to the mobile object 100 that the user is scheduled to receive.
  • the registration identification information can be supplied from the management device 400 to the mobile object 100 via the network 24.
  • the registration identification information may include user identification information that is information regarding the user who is scheduled to use the mobile object 100.
  • the supply of the registration identification information from the management device 400 to the mobile object 100 can be promptly completed before the user receives the mobile object 100.
  • the authentication unit 126 provided in the mobile object 100 stores the registration identification information supplied from the management device 400 in the storage unit 104. In this way, the reservation for use of the mobile object 100 is made.
  • Registration identification information is supplied to the mobile object 100 that has been reserved for use. Whether or not the mobile object 100 has been reserved for use can be determined based on whether registration identification information is stored in the storage unit 104, but is not limited thereto.
  • the user who has borrowed the mobile object 100 performs an authentication process using the mobile terminal 200.
  • information regarding the user may be supplied from the mobile terminal 200 to the mobile object 100.
  • the information regarding the user may include user identification information regarding the user.
  • Authentication unit 126 determines whether the user identification information supplied from mobile terminal 200 and the registered identification information supplied from management device 400 match. Based on the fact that the user identification information supplied from the mobile terminal 200 and the registered identification information supplied from the management device 400 match, the authentication unit 126 can authenticate the user. That is, the authentication unit 126 can authenticate the user who performed the authentication process using the mobile terminal 200 as a user who is authorized to use the mobile object 100.
  • the control unit 114 While the user has not been authenticated by the authentication unit 126, the control unit 114 controls the lock mechanism 106 to be in a locked state. When the user is authenticated by the authentication unit 126, the control unit 114 controls the lock mechanism 106 to be in the unlocked state. In this way, locking and unlocking can be performed using the mobile terminal 200.
  • a user may discover a problem with the mobile object 100 that the user has borrowed. That is, the user may discover a maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (see FIG. 3), which is a mobile object that requires maintenance. If it is preferable to restrict the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the user performs a process for restricting the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A using the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user. obtain.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the reception section 216.
  • the reception unit 216 can receive input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance required mobile object information may include the management number of the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance-requiring moving body information may include malfunction content information indicating the content of the malfunction occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A.
  • Acceptance of input of maintenance required mobile object information may be performed as follows. That is, the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays an input screen for inputting maintenance required moving body information on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200. Maintenance required mobile object information can be input by the user on the input screen. The maintenance required mobile object information input in this manner can be accepted by the reception unit 216.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the usage restriction information providing unit 218.
  • the usage restriction information providing unit 218 can supply usage restriction information for restricting the use of the maintenance required mobile body 100A when the maintenance required mobile body information is received by the reception unit 216. More specifically, the usage restriction information providing unit 218 can supply usage restriction information for restricting the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A to the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the mobile object 100 may be equipped with the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116.
  • the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116 can acquire usage restriction information supplied from the mobile terminal 200.
  • the mobile object 100 may be equipped with the usage restriction section 118.
  • the usage restriction unit 118 can restrict usage of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A when the usage restriction information is acquired by the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116.
  • the usage restriction unit 118 can restrict the usage of the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A by setting the locking mechanism 106 provided in the mobile body 100 to a locked state.
  • the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A becomes as follows. That is, in such a case, even if the user identification information supplied from the mobile terminal 200 matches the registered identification information stored in the storage unit 104 provided in the mobile object 100, the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A It cannot be used by the user.
  • the authentication unit 126 provided in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A will not authenticate the user even if the user who has made the reservation for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A performs the authentication process. not authenticate.
  • the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A can be restricted, so that the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A can be prevented from being used by a user.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S1 the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S2.
  • step S2 the usage restriction information providing unit 218 provided in the mobile terminal 200 supplies usage restriction information to the mobile object 100.
  • the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116 provided in the mobile object 100 acquires the usage restriction information supplied from the mobile terminal 200. After this, the process moves to step S3.
  • step S3 the usage restriction unit 118 provided in the mobile object 100 restricts the usage of the mobile object 100. In this way, the processing shown in FIG. 4 is completed.
  • the use of the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may be restricted. Locking of the port lock mechanism 38 is controlled by the management machine 30.
  • the information for setting the port lock mechanism 38 to the locked state is managed via the management device 400, for example. machine 30. Information for setting the port lock mechanism 38 to the locked state may be supplied from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 30.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the maintenance-required moving object information providing unit 220.
  • the maintenance-required mobile object information providing section 220 can provide the maintenance-required mobile object information to the management device 400 when the maintenance-required mobile object information is received by the reception section 216.
  • the storage unit 404 provided in the management device 400 may include the mobile information storage unit 428. Information regarding each mobile object 100 can be stored in the mobile object information storage section 428.
  • the control unit 408 performs the following processing. That is, in such a case, the control unit 408 stores the maintenance-required moving body information in the moving body information storage unit 428 as information regarding the one moving body 100.
  • the management device 400 may include the reservation reception unit 410.
  • the reservation accepting unit 410 can accept a reservation for using the mobile object 100.
  • the storage unit 404 provided in the management device 400 may include the reservation information storage unit 430.
  • the reservation information storage unit 430 can store information regarding usage reservations for each mobile object 100. Further, the reservation information storage unit 430 may store information for restricting usage reservations for each mobile object 100.
  • the reservation accepting unit 410 can limit reservations for use of the mobile body 100 corresponding to the maintenance required mobile body information based on the maintenance required mobile body information. Examples of restrictions on usage reservations include, but are not limited to, cancellation of usage reservations.
  • the restriction on usage reservations may be a restriction on the frequency of usage reservations. In this manner, according to the present embodiment, reservations for use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A can be accurately restricted.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S11 the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S12.
  • step S12 the maintenance required moving object information providing unit 220 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides maintenance required moving object information to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S13.
  • step S13 the reservation accepting unit 410 provided in the management device 400 restricts reservations for use of the mobile object 100. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 5 is completed.
  • the mobile body 100 is equipped with the inter-mobile body communication section 111.
  • the inter-mobile communication unit 111 can perform inter-mobile communication with another mobile unit 100 located within the communication range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111.
  • the communicable range of the inter-mobile communication section 111 is, for example, a radius of about 300 meters centered on the inter-mobile communication section 111, but is not limited thereto.
  • the inter-mobile body communication unit 111 can communicate only with other mobile bodies 100 located within the communicable range.
  • the inter-mobile body communication unit 111 cannot communicate with other mobile bodies 100 located outside the communicable range. Therefore, if such inter-mobile body communication is used, communication can be selectively performed only with the mobile bodies 100 located within the communication range of the inter-mobile body communication unit 111.
  • the mobile object 100 is equipped with the reservation transfer unit 122.
  • the reservation transfer unit 122 can transfer the usage reservation to the available mobile unit 100B, which is another available mobile unit 100. Transfer of the usage reservation may be performed, for example, as follows. That is, the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the mobile body 100 inquires of the other mobile body 100 whether or not the other mobile body 100 has already made a reservation for use. If the other mobile body 100 has already been reserved for use, further inquiries are made to the other mobile body 100. If the other mobile object 100 to which the inquiry is made does not have a usage reservation, the usage reservation can be transferred to the other mobile object 100.
  • the usage reservation is transferred to the available mobile body 100B.
  • the usage reservation can be transferred to the available mobile unit 100B located within the communication range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111.
  • the management device 400 when the management device 400 accepts a usage reservation, the management device 400 supplies registration identification information and the like to the mobile object 100 for which the usage reservation has been made.
  • the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the maintenance required mobile body 100A transfers the usage reservation
  • the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the maintenance required mobile unit 100A registers in the available mobile unit 100B.
  • the authentication unit 126 provided in the available mobile body 100B performs the following processing.
  • the authentication section 126 provided in the available mobile object 100B stores the registration identification information supplied from the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A in the storage section 104 provided in the available mobile object 100B. In this way, the usage reservation can be transferred from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A to the available mobile body 100B using inter-mobile communication.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S21 the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116 provided in the mobile object 100 acquires usage restriction information. After this, the process moves to step S22.
  • step S22 the inter-mobile body communication unit 111 provided in the mobile body 100 communicates with another mobile body 100. That is, the inter-mobile body communication unit 111 provided in the maintenance-required mobile body 100A communicates with other mobile bodies 100. If the available mobile body 100B exists within the communication range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111 (YES in step S23), the process moves to step S24. If there is no available mobile body 100B within the communicable range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111 (NO in step S23), the process shown in FIG. 6 is completed.
  • step S24 the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A transfers the usage reservation to the usable mobile body 100B. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 6 is completed.
  • the inter-mobile communication using the inter-mobile communication unit 111 may be used as follows. That is, information regarding the one mobile body 100 is supplied from one mobile body 100 to another mobile body 100 through inter-mobile communication. The other mobile body 100 that has received the information regarding the one mobile body 100 through inter-mobile communication supplies the information regarding the one mobile body 100 to the management device 400 using the communication unit 112 . In this way, information regarding one mobile body 100 can be supplied to the management device 400 via another mobile body 100. It is useful to use such a method in cases such as when one mobile object 100 cannot perform communication using the communication unit 112.
  • the maintenance-required mobile object information may be provided by a user of the sharing system 12, or may be provided by a person other than the user of the sharing system 12.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an example of a mobile communication terminal. An example of a mobile communication terminal owned by a person who is not a user of the sharing system 12 is shown in FIG.
  • the mobile communication terminal 200A is a terminal owned by a person who is not a user of the sharing system 12.
  • the mobile communication terminal 200A may be, for example, a portable electronic device. Examples of such portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, smartphones.
  • the mobile communication terminal 200A may be a tablet terminal, a wearable terminal, or the like.
  • Application software for using the sharing system 12 is not installed on the mobile communication terminal 200A.
  • the mobile communication terminal 200A may include a calculation section 202A, a storage section 204A, an imaging section 206A, an operation section 208A, a display section 210A, and a communication section 212A. Furthermore, the mobile communication terminal 200A may further include a speaker (not shown), a microphone (not shown), and the like. Note that the mobile communication terminal 200A may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here.
  • the calculation unit 202A may be configured by, for example, a processor such as a CPU or a GPU. That is, the calculation unit 202A may be configured by a processing circuit.
  • the calculation unit 202A may include a control unit 214A and a display control unit 226A.
  • the control unit 214A is in charge of overall control of the mobile communication terminal 200A.
  • the display control unit 226A controls the screen display of the display unit 210A.
  • the control unit 214A and the display control unit 226A can be realized by the program stored in the storage unit 204A being executed by the calculation unit 202A.
  • control unit 214A and the display control unit 226A may be realized by an integrated circuit such as ASIC or FPGA. Further, at least a portion of the control unit 214A and the display control unit 226A may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
  • the storage unit 204A may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 204A may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
  • the imaging unit 206A that is, the camera can perform imaging.
  • the operation unit 208A can be used by the user of the mobile communication terminal 200A to operate the mobile communication terminal 200A.
  • the display section 210A is equipped with a display element (not shown).
  • a display element for example, a liquid crystal display element, an organic electroluminescence display element, etc. can be used.
  • the operation unit 208A and the display unit 210A may be configured by a touch panel (not shown) equipped with such a display element.
  • the communication unit 212A can perform wireless communication and the like.
  • the communication unit 212A can perform wireless communication via the base station 23 and the network 24.
  • the mobile communication terminal 200A can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 212A included in the mobile communication terminal 200A and the network 24.
  • the communication unit 212A can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 212A can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like.
  • the communication unit 212A may be equipped with a short-range wireless communication module (not shown). As the short-range wireless communication module, for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the owner of the mobile communication terminal 200A is not a user of the sharing system 12. Therefore, the mobile communication terminal 200A does not have a program installed therein for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment. Therefore, it is preferable that information for establishing communication between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400 is provided to the mobile communication terminal 200A.
  • Information for establishing communication between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400 may be provided by, for example, the information presentation unit 110 provided in the mobile body 100, but is not limited thereto.
  • the information presentation unit 110 may be equipped with, for example, a QR code (registered trademark).
  • the QR code registered trademark
  • the QR code can provide information for establishing communication between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400.
  • information indicating the URL of the management device 400, etc. may be presented by the QR code (registered trademark).
  • the QR code registered trademark
  • the QR code can be imaged by an imaging unit 206A provided in the mobile communication terminal 200A.
  • a control unit 214A included in the mobile communication terminal 200A analyzes presentation information included in the image acquired by the imaging unit 206A.
  • information indicating the URL of the management device 400, etc. can be presented using the QR code (registered trademark).
  • the control unit 214A can acquire information regarding the URL and the like of the management device 400 in this manner.
  • the control unit 214A accesses the management device 400 based on the information obtained in this way. In this way, communication can be established between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400.
  • an input screen for inputting maintenance required mobile object information is displayed on the display unit 210A provided in the mobile communication terminal 200A.
  • the owner of the mobile communication terminal 200A inputs maintenance-required mobile object information by performing an input operation on the input screen.
  • the maintenance required mobile object information input in this way is provided to the management device 400 from the mobile communication terminal 200A.
  • the application software for using the sharing system 12 is not installed on the mobile communication terminal 200A, maintenance-required mobile object information is promptly sent to the management device 400. may be provided.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S31 the mobile communication terminal 200A reads the presentation information presented by the information presentation unit 110. After this, the process moves to step S32.
  • step S32 the mobile communication terminal 200A accesses the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S33.
  • step S33 communication is established between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S34.
  • step S34 the owner of the mobile communication terminal 200A inputs maintenance required mobile object information. After this, the process moves to step S35.
  • step S35 the mobile communication terminal 200A provides maintenance required mobile object information to the management device 400. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 8 is completed.
  • the management device 400 can estimate whether the mobile object 100 has reached the level of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the management device 400 may include the estimation unit 412.
  • the estimation unit 412 can estimate whether or not each mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A based on the maintenance history, usage history, etc. regarding each mobile body 100. For example, if the period of time that has elapsed since the comprehensive inspection of the mobile object 100 has reached a predetermined period, the estimation unit 412 estimates that the mobile object 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile object 100A. It is possible.
  • the estimating unit 412 It can be estimated that the mobile body 100 corresponds to the maintenance required mobile body 100A. Furthermore, the estimating unit 412 may estimate the deterioration state of the battery 108 based on the above-mentioned travel data acquired when the mobile object 100 is used. The travel data can be stored in the usage history storage section 436, as described above. Estimating unit 412 can estimate the remaining capacity of battery 108 provided in mobile object 100 based on travel data. Furthermore, the estimating unit 412 can estimate the deterioration state of the battery 108 provided in the mobile object 100 based on the driving data.
  • the estimation unit 412 can estimate the deterioration state of the battery 108 based on a battery deterioration model acquired in advance, but is not limited thereto.
  • the reservation accepting unit 410 provided in the management device 400 limits reservations for the mobile body 100 that has been estimated by the estimating unit 412 to fall under the maintenance required mobile body 100A. According to the present embodiment, reservations for use of the mobile body 100 estimated to fall under the maintenance required mobile body 100A can be restricted, so that it is more effective to prevent users from using the mobile body 100 with a problem. can be prevented.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S41 the estimating unit 412 provided in the management device 400 estimates whether each mobile object 100 has reached the level of the maintenance required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S42.
  • step S42 the reservation accepting unit 410 restricts reservations for the mobile body 100 that has been estimated by the estimating unit 412 to fall under the maintenance required mobile body 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 9 is completed.
  • the management device 400 may include the maintenance required information distribution unit 414.
  • the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required moving body 100A to the maintenance member.
  • the maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 distributes maintenance-required information for requesting maintenance work to maintenance members.
  • the maintenance required information may include information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • the information regarding the maintenance required mobile body 100A may include mobile body identification information of the maintenance required mobile body 100A.
  • the information regarding the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may include information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A.
  • the information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A may include information indicating maintenance work required by the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A may include malfunction content information indicating the content of the malfunction occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S51 maintenance required mobile object information is provided from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S52.
  • step S52 the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 distributes maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A to the maintenance members. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 10 is completed.
  • the management device 400 may include the determination unit 416.
  • the determining unit 416 determines based on the maintenance member information whether the owner of the mobile terminal 200 who has provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. obtain.
  • the maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 performs the following processing. That is, in such a case, the maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance-required information to the terminal device 300 owned by a maintenance member who can perform maintenance work on the maintenance-required mobile object 100A.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S61 the determination unit 416 provided in the management device 400 performs the following processing. That is, the determination unit 416 determines whether the owner of the mobile terminal 200 that has provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, based on the maintenance member information. judge. If the determination unit 416 determines that the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is unable to perform the maintenance work (YES in step S61), the process moves to step S62. If the determination unit 416 determines that the owner of the mobile terminal 200 can perform the maintenance work (NO in step S61), the process moves to step S63.
  • step S62 the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 distributes the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by a maintenance member who can perform maintenance work on the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • step S63 the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 entrusts the maintenance work to the owner of the mobile terminal 200 that provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400. That is, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance required information to the mobile terminal 200 that has provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 11 is completed.
  • the malfunction content determination unit 225 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can determine the malfunction content that is the content of the malfunction occurring in the mobile object 100.
  • the malfunction content determination unit 225 can determine the malfunction content based on the image acquired by the imaging unit 206, for example. For example, a part of the moving body 100 is imaged by the imaging unit 206. When an image of a tire provided on the moving body 100 is captured by the imaging unit 206, the defect content determining unit 225 can determine whether or not the tire is punctured.
  • the malfunction content determination unit 225 can determine whether or not the tire is punctured, for example, by comparing the reference image showing the tire with the puncture and the image acquired by the imaging unit 206. , but not limited to.
  • Such a reference image may be stored in advance in the storage unit 204 provided in the mobile terminal 200, for example, but is not limited thereto.
  • the display control unit 226 included in the mobile terminal 200 can display the defect content determined by the defect content determination unit 225 on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200 . In this way, the user may be able to understand the details of the problem occurring in the mobile object 100.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S71 the imaging unit 206 included in the mobile terminal 200 acquires an image of a portion of the moving object 100. After this, the process moves to step S72.
  • step S72 the malfunction content determining unit 225 provided in the mobile terminal 200 determines the malfunction content, which is the content of the malfunction occurring in the mobile object 100, based on the image acquired by the imaging unit 206. After this, the process moves to step S73.
  • step S73 the display control section 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays defect content information indicating the defect content determined by the defect content determination section 225 on the display section 210. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 12 is completed.
  • the management device 400 may include the notification unit 418.
  • the notification unit 418 In a state where a usage reservation for one mobile body 100 is accepted by the reservation reception unit 410, when the one mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A, the notification unit 418 performs the following: The following processing can be performed. In such a case, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B, which is another available mobile body 100, to the user who made the usage reservation for the one mobile body 100.
  • the user terminal which is the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user, is notified.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S81 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 determines whether one mobile object 100 has come to correspond to the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. When one mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A (YES in step S81), the process moves to step S82. If the one mobile body 100 has not reached the level of the maintenance required mobile body 100A (NO in step S81), the process shown in FIG. 13 is completed.
  • step S82 the control unit 408 determines whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 is being accepted.
  • the control unit 408 can determine whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted based on the usage reservation information stored in the reservation information storage unit 430. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted (YES in step S82), the process moves to step S83. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has not been accepted (NO in step S82), the process shown in FIG. 13 is completed.
  • step S83 the notification unit 418 provided in the management device 400 performs the following processing. That is, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B, which is another available mobile body 100, to the user who has made the usage reservation for the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A.
  • the user terminal which is the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user, is notified. After this, the process moves to step S84.
  • step S84 the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays the usage reservation change information on the display unit 210. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 13 is completed.
  • the notification unit 418 provided in the management device 400 performs the following process. conduct. That is, in such a case, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information to the mobile terminal (user terminal) 200. If there is no usable moving object 100B at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A, the notification unit 418 performs the following processing. In other words, in such a case, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B that is located at a position of a first distance or more and less than a second distance from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A. The mobile terminal (user terminal) 200 is notified.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S91 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 determines whether one mobile object 100 has come to correspond to the maintenance required mobile object 100A. When one mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A (YES in step S91), the process moves to step S92. If the one mobile body 100 has not reached the level of the maintenance required mobile body 100A (NO in step S91), the process shown in FIG. 14 is completed.
  • step S92 the control unit 408 determines whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 is being accepted.
  • the control unit 408 can determine whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted based on the usage reservation information stored in the reservation information storage unit 430. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted (YES in step S92), the process moves to step S93. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has not been accepted (NO in step S92), the process shown in FIG. 14 is completed.
  • step S93 the control unit 408 determines whether the usable moving object 100B exists at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. If the usable mobile body 100B exists at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance required mobile body 100A (YES in step S93), the process moves to step S94. If the usable mobile body 100B does not exist at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance required mobile body 100A (NO in step S93), the process moves to step S95.
  • step S94 the notification unit 418 notifies the mobile terminal 200 of usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B existing at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance required mobile body 100A. . After this, the process moves to step S96.
  • step S95 the notification unit 418 carries usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B that is located at a position of a first distance or more and less than a second distance from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A.
  • the terminal 200 is notified. After this, the process moves to step S96.
  • step S96 the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays the usage reservation change information on the display unit 210. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 14 is completed.
  • the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance-required mobile object information providing unit 220 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides the maintenance-required mobile object information received by the reception unit 216 to the management device 400.
  • the management device 400 may include the selection unit 420.
  • the selection unit 420 can select a destination of maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • the number of distribution destinations is not particularly limited.
  • the selection unit 420 can select the destination of the maintenance-required information from among a plurality of pre-registered maintenance members.
  • the selection unit 420 can select the distribution destination of the maintenance-required information based on the position of the maintenance-required mobile object 100A corresponding to the maintenance-required mobile object information and the position of the maintenance member.
  • the selection unit 420 may select, for example, a maintenance member who is located less than a predetermined distance from the maintenance-required mobile object 100A as the recipient of the maintenance-required information.
  • the selection unit 420 can select a distribution destination for the maintenance required information based further on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle.
  • the selection unit 420 selects a maintenance member who can respond to the malfunction specified by the malfunction content information as a recipient of the maintenance required information.
  • the selection unit 420 does not select a maintenance member who cannot respond to the problem specified by the problem content information as a recipient of the maintenance information.
  • the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member selected by the selection unit 420.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the member evaluation section 422.
  • the member evaluation unit 422 may generate member evaluation information, which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance member, based on work evaluation information, which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work performed by the maintenance member.
  • the work evaluation information may include, for example, information regarding the evaluation of work quality, which is the quality of the maintenance work provided by the maintenance member. If the quality of the work provided by the maintenance member is relatively high, the member evaluation unit 422 may set the evaluation of the maintenance member relatively high. Work quality may be determined from a long-term perspective. That is, the work quality of the maintenance work is determined based on the period until the one mobile object 100 again requires the same maintenance work as the one maintenance work performed on the one mobile object 100. It's okay. Further, for example, based on the distance traveled by the one moving body 100 until the same one maintenance work as the one maintenance work performed on the one moving body 100 is required again, , the work quality for the maintenance work may be determined.
  • the work evaluation information may include information regarding the evaluation of the difficulty level of the maintenance work provided by the maintenance member. If the difficulty level of the maintenance work provided by the maintenance member is relatively high, the member evaluation unit 422 may set the evaluation of the maintenance member relatively high.
  • the work evaluation information may include information regarding the evaluation of the promptness of the maintenance member's response. If the maintenance member responds quickly, the member evaluation unit 422 may set a relatively high evaluation for the maintenance member.
  • the work evaluation information may include information regarding the evaluation of the suitability of the parts selected by the maintenance member. If the parts selected by the maintenance member during maintenance work are appropriate, the member evaluation unit 422 can set a relatively high evaluation for the maintenance member. As described above, for example, for the moving body 100 used in areas prone to salt damage, it is preferable to select parts that have been sufficiently rust-proofed. Further, as described above, it is preferable to select a brake pad with sufficiently high durability for the moving body 100 used in an area with many slopes.
  • the member evaluation unit 422 can generate member evaluation information about the maintenance member by comprehensively evaluating a plurality of pieces of work evaluation information about the maintenance member.
  • the work evaluation information may be generated based on at least one of the maintenance history and usage history regarding the mobile object 100. For example, the period until one mobile body 100 requires maintenance work of the same content as one maintenance work performed on one mobile body 100 is determined based on the maintenance history of the one mobile body 100. It can be understood that Further, for example, the distance traveled by the one moving body 100 until the same one maintenance work that was performed on the one moving body 100 is required again is It can be grasped based on the usage history of one mobile object 100.
  • the selection unit 420 may select maintenance members based on the member evaluation information generated by the member evaluation unit 422. For example, the selection unit 420 may preferentially select maintenance members with relatively high evaluations.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the remuneration information input reception unit 316.
  • the remuneration information input receiving unit 316 can receive input of remuneration information that is information regarding remuneration when the maintenance member performs maintenance work. Such remuneration information can be set for each of multiple types of maintenance work. Reception of input of remuneration information may be performed as follows. That is, the display control section 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays an input screen for inputting remuneration information on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300. Remuneration information may be input by the maintenance member on the input screen. The remuneration information input in this manner can be accepted by the remuneration information input reception unit 316.
  • the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies remuneration information regarding the maintenance member to the management device 400.
  • Remuneration information regarding each maintenance member may be stored in the maintenance member information storage unit 432, as described above. As described above, remuneration information can be set for each of a plurality of types of maintenance work that can be provided by the maintenance member.
  • the selection unit 420 may select maintenance members based on remuneration information corresponding to the maintenance members. For example, if there are multiple maintenance members who can perform the maintenance work required by the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the selection unit 420 may select the maintenance member who has the lowest remuneration for the maintenance work.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S101 the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S102.
  • step S102 the maintenance required mobile object information providing unit 220 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides the maintenance required mobile object information to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S103.
  • step S103 the selection unit 420 included in the management device 400 selects the destination of the maintenance required information. After this, the process moves to step S104.
  • step S104 the management device 400 distributes the maintenance required information to the distribution destination selected by the selection unit 420. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 15 is completed.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the completion information reception unit 318.
  • the completion information receiving unit 318 can receive input of work completion information indicating that the maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A has been completed.
  • the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies the work completion information to the management device 400.
  • Work completion information for each maintenance work can be stored in a maintenance history storage unit 434 or the like provided in the management device 400.
  • the management device 400 may store the location of the rental port 22 where the mobile object 100 for which the maintenance work has been completed was located as the location of the maintenance member.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S111 the completion information receiving unit 318 provided in the terminal device 300 can receive input of work completion information. After this, the process moves to step S112.
  • step S112 the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies work completion information to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S113.
  • step S113 the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 stores the work completion information in the maintenance history storage unit 434 or the like. After this, the process moves to step S114.
  • step S114 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 stores the position of the rental port 22 where the mobile object 100 for which the maintenance work has been completed was located as the position of the maintenance member. In this way, the processing shown in FIG. 16 is completed.
  • the management device 400 may include the selection unit 420.
  • the selection unit 420 selects the distribution destination of the maintenance-required information from among the plurality of maintenance members registered in advance, based on the location of the maintenance-required mobile object 100A and the location of the maintenance member. .
  • the selection unit 420 may select, for example, a maintenance member who is located less than a predetermined distance from the maintenance-required mobile object 100A as the recipient of the maintenance-required information.
  • the location of the maintenance member may be registered in advance in the maintenance member information storage unit 432, for example, but is not limited thereto. If information indicating the current location of a terminal device 300 owned by a maintenance member is supplied from the terminal device 300 to the management device 400, the location of the maintenance member may be grasped based on the current location. good.
  • the selection unit 420 selects the delivery destination of the maintenance information based on defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A and available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. may be selected.
  • the management device 400 may include the maintenance required information distribution unit 414.
  • the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 can distribute the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member selected by the selection unit 420.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the display control section 330.
  • the display control unit 330 can display information indicating maintenance work on the display unit 310 based on the maintenance required information distributed from the management device 400.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • the display control unit 330 can display a display screen 332 on the display unit 310.
  • a map 334 may be displayed on the display screen 332.
  • the display control unit 330 can display information 336 indicating maintenance work on the map 334.
  • Information 336 indicating maintenance work may be displayed at a position corresponding to the position of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the display control unit 330 can display graphics (symbols, marks) 338G, 338B, 338P, 338V, and 338Y on the display unit 310 according to the maintenance work.
  • the display control unit 330 can display graphics 338G, 338B, 338P, 338V, and 338Y on the display unit 310 in a manner corresponding to the type of maintenance work.
  • the reference numeral 338 is used, and when explaining the individual figures separately, the numbers 338G, 338B, 338P, 338V, and 338Y are used.
  • the display control unit 330 may display a graphic 338 in a color corresponding to the type of maintenance work on the display unit 310.
  • the first color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the first type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance work.
  • a second color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the second type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works.
  • a third color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the third type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works.
  • a fourth color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the fourth type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works.
  • a fifth color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the fifth type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works.
  • the display control unit 330 can display text information 340 indicating the type of maintenance work along with the graphic 338.
  • the maintenance work when the type of maintenance work is "inspection”, the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a green figure 338G.
  • the maintenance work when the type of maintenance work is "charging”, the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a blue figure 338B.
  • the maintenance work when the type of maintenance work is "maintenance”, the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a pink figure 338P.
  • the type of maintenance work is "movement”
  • the maintenance work when the type of maintenance work is "movement”, the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a purple figure 338V.
  • the type of maintenance work when the type of maintenance work is "cleaning", the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a yellow figure 338Y.
  • the mode depending on the type of maintenance work is not limited to color.
  • the aspect depending on the type of maintenance work may be, for example, the shape. That is, a graphic 338 having a shape corresponding to the type of maintenance work may be displayed on the display unit 310.
  • the display control unit 330 can display the graphic 338 on the display unit 310 in a manner according to the amount of work (man-hours) required for the maintenance work.
  • the graphic 338 may be displayed on the display unit 310 in a size that corresponds to the amount of work required for maintenance work.
  • the maintenance work may be indicated by a relatively small size graphic 338.
  • the maintenance work may be indicated by a medium-sized graphic 338.
  • the maintenance work may be indicated by a relatively large-sized graphic 338.
  • the display control unit 330 may display the graphic 338 on the display unit 310 in a manner according to the distance between the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A and the maintenance member.
  • a graphic 338 having a size corresponding to the distance between the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A and the maintenance member may be displayed on the display unit 310.
  • the maintenance work can be indicated by a relatively large-sized graphic 338.
  • the maintenance work can be indicated by a medium-sized figure 338.
  • the maintenance work can be indicated by a relatively large-sized graphic 338.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the reception section 315.
  • the receiving unit 315 receives a commissioned operation input, which is an input of a commissioned operation by a maintenance member for the maintenance work displayed on the display unit 310.
  • the accepting unit 315 accepts a consent operation input, which is an input of a maintenance member's consent operation for the maintenance work displayed on the display unit 310.
  • the reception unit 315 can accept an input of commissioned operation for maintenance work based on the maintenance member's operation on the graphic 338 displayed on the display unit 310. When the maintenance member taps the graphic 338 displayed on the display unit 310, the maintenance member can undertake the maintenance work indicated by the graphic 338.
  • a single maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may require multiple maintenance operations.
  • the display control unit 330 may display the following when one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A requires multiple maintenance operations. That is, in such a case, the display control unit 330 can display the commissioned maintenance work and the uncontracted maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works in different manners on the display unit 310. For example, the maintenance work selected by the maintenance member may be highlighted, and the maintenance work not selected by the maintenance member may be displayed blinking. Highlighting the maintenance task may be performed, for example, but not limited to, by increasing the color intensity of the graphic 338.
  • the maintenance member may be entrusted with “maintenance” but not “movement”.
  • the graphic 338P may be highlighted and the graphic 338V indicating "move” may be displayed blinking. Highlighting may be performed, for example, by increasing the color density of the graphic 338P, but is not limited thereto.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • a graphic 338P indicating "maintenance” selected by the maintenance member is highlighted.
  • a graphic 338V indicating "move" that has not been selected by the maintenance member is blinking.
  • the display control unit 330 can selectively display on the display unit 310 information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle.
  • Available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle may be stored in advance in the storage unit 304 provided in the terminal device 300, for example.
  • the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle can be grasped based on the available work information regarding the maintenance member. Therefore, even if maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle and maintenance tasks that the maintenance member cannot handle are included in the maintenance required information supplied from the management device 400, It will look like this: That is, even in such a case, the display control unit 330 can display only the maintenance work that can be handled by the maintenance member on the display unit 310.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • only maintenance tasks that can be handled by the maintenance member are displayed. For example, if the maintenance member can only perform the maintenance work of "cleaning”, the maintenance work of "inspection”, “charging”, “maintenance”, and “movement” will not be displayed on the display screen 332.
  • the display control unit 330 may perform the following operations. That is, in such a case, the display control unit 330 displays the information that the one maintenance-requiring moving object 100A requires only when the maintenance member can handle all of the plurality of maintenance tasks that the one maintenance-requiring moving object 100A requires. Maintenance work may also be displayed. That is, if the maintenance member cannot perform any of the maintenance work required by one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A, the display control unit 330 displays the maintenance work required by one maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. Don't show all your work. As described above, the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle may be stored in advance in the storage unit 304 provided in the terminal device 300, for example.
  • the display control unit 330 displays the maintenance work required by the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A on the display unit 310 when the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A is capable of handling all of the plurality of maintenance works required. It is possible.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • a case will be described in which one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A requires maintenance work of "maintenance” and maintenance work of "movement”. If the maintenance member can perform "maintenance” maintenance work but cannot perform "transfer” maintenance work, the following will occur. That is, neither the "maintenance” maintenance work nor the "movement” maintenance work occurring on the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A is displayed on the display unit 310.
  • the display control unit 330 may display maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle and maintenance tasks that the maintenance member cannot handle on the display unit 310 in different ways.
  • the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle may be stored in advance in the storage unit 304 provided in the terminal device 300, for example.
  • the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle can be grasped based on the available work information regarding the maintenance member. Therefore, the display control unit 330 can display maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle and maintenance tasks that the maintenance member cannot handle in different ways on the display unit 310. For example, maintenance tasks that cannot be handled by the maintenance member may be displayed in gray.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. If the maintenance member cannot handle the "movement" maintenance work, the "movement" maintenance work may be displayed in gray out, for example, as shown in FIG. 21.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the entrusted information supply unit 320.
  • the commissioned information supply unit 320 supplies the management device 400 with commissioned information indicating that the commissioned operation input for the maintenance work was performed by a maintenance member.
  • the management device 400 may include the processing unit 423.
  • the processing unit 423 can entrust the maintenance member to the maintenance member based on the entrustment information.
  • the processing unit 423 may perform the following processing. That is, when one or more maintenance members are entrusted with all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the processing unit 423 assigns these maintenance tasks to the maintenance members. The commission may be established.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S121 the selection unit 420 included in the management device 400 selects the destination of the required maintenance information from among a plurality of pre-registered maintenance members. After this, the process moves to step S122.
  • step S122 the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 distributes the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member selected by the selection unit 420. After this, the process moves to step S123.
  • step S123 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays information indicating maintenance work on the display unit 310 based on the maintenance required information. After this, the process moves to step S124.
  • step S124 the receiving unit 315 provided in the terminal device 300 receives a commissioned operation input, which is an input of a commissioned operation by a maintenance member for the maintenance work displayed on the display unit 310. After this, the process moves to step S125.
  • step S125 the consignment information supply unit 320 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies the management device 400 with consignment information indicating that a maintenance member has performed a consignment operation input for the maintenance work. After this, the process moves to step S126.
  • step S126 the processing unit 423 provided in the management device 400 establishes entrustment to the maintenance member based on the entrustment information. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 22 is completed.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 shows an example where one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A requires multiple maintenance operations.
  • step S131 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays information indicating maintenance work on the display unit 310. After this, the process moves to step S132.
  • step S132 one of the maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A is selected by the maintenance member. After this, the process moves to step S133.
  • step S133 the display control unit 330 highlights the maintenance work selected by the maintenance member.
  • step S134 the display control unit 330 blinks and displays maintenance tasks that have not been selected by the maintenance member. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 23 is completed.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S141 the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 extracts maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle from among the required maintenance information distributed from the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S142.
  • step S142 the display control unit 330 displays information indicating maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle on the display unit 310. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 24 is completed.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 shows an example where a single maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A requires multiple maintenance operations.
  • step S151 the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 determines whether the maintenance member can handle all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. If the maintenance member can handle all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (YES in step S151), the process moves to step S152. If the maintenance member cannot handle all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (NO in step S151), the process moves to step S153.
  • step S152 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays all of the plurality of maintenance tasks required by the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 25 is completed.
  • step S153 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 does not display all of the plurality of maintenance tasks required by the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 25 is completed.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the image acquisition unit 322.
  • the image acquisition unit 322 can acquire the image acquired by the imaging unit 306.
  • the image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322 may be provided to the management device 400.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the mobile object determination section 417.
  • the moving object determination unit 417 can determine whether the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image.
  • the mobile object determination unit 417 uses information regarding the current position of the terminal device 300, an image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322 provided in the terminal device 300, and information regarding the position of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Based on this, it can be determined whether the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image.
  • the mobile object determination unit 417 determines whether the maintenance member is located near the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. It can be determined whether or not.
  • the information regarding the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A may include, for example, the management number of the port locking mechanism 38 that locks the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A.
  • the mobile object determination unit 417 determines whether or not the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A is included in the image based on the management number etc. appearing in the image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322 provided in the terminal device 300. can be determined.
  • the control section 408 provided in the management device 400 transmits information regarding the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A to the terminal device 300. Provided to. More specifically, the control unit 408 can supply information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image to the terminal device 300.
  • the QR code registered trademark
  • the QR code registered trademark
  • the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 acquires information regarding the mobile object 100 by analyzing the information presented by the QR code (registered trademark).
  • the control unit 314 provides information regarding the mobile object 100 to the management device 400.
  • a control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 determines that the mobile body 100 is a maintenance required mobile body 100A based on the information supplied from the terminal device 300 and the information stored in the mobile body information storage unit 428. It can be determined whether or not.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the display control section 330.
  • the display control unit 330 can display the image acquired by the imaging unit 306 on the display unit 310.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 26 shows an example where a plurality of moving objects 100 are displayed on the display screen 344.
  • the display control unit 330 can display a graphic 342 corresponding to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A superimposed on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A.
  • the display control unit 330 displays a graphic 342 indicating that the moving object 100 corresponds to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A, superimposed on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A.
  • the management device 400 can supply the terminal device 300 with information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image. Therefore, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 can grasp the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image.
  • the display control unit 330 can display a graphic 342 indicating that the moving body 100 corresponds to the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in a superimposed manner on the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A.
  • the graphic 342 corresponding to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may be, for example, an arrow, but is not limited thereto.
  • the figure 342 may be, for example, a circle, an ellipse, or the like surrounding the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. Further, the graphic 342 may be a graphic corresponding to the external shape of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A.
  • the management device 400 can provide the terminal device 300 with information indicating a maintenance target part that is a part to be maintained in the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 27 shows an example in which information indicating the maintenance target site is displayed on the display screen 344.
  • the display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 can display a graphic 346 indicating a maintenance target site in a superimposed manner on the maintenance target site.
  • the maintenance target part is, for example, the battery 108
  • the graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on the battery 108, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on a battery holder (not shown) to which the battery 108 is attached.
  • the graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on the light, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on a lighting switch that is a switch for lighting the light.
  • the management device 400 can supply the terminal device 300 with information indicating the content of maintenance work for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 can display information indicating the content of the maintenance work for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A on the display unit 310.
  • the display control unit 330 displays information to the display unit 310 that the content of the maintenance work is charging the battery 108. can be displayed.
  • the display control unit 330 can display text information 348 indicating the content of the maintenance work in a superimposed manner on the maintenance target site.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the audio information providing section 324.
  • the audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information indicating the content of the maintenance work that the maintenance member needs to provide.
  • the audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information indicating the content of the maintenance work that the maintenance member needs to provide via a speaker (not shown) provided in the terminal device 300 or the like.
  • the management device 400 may include the work state suitability determination unit 424.
  • the work state suitability determination unit 424 can determine the suitability of the work state during maintenance work based on the image supplied from the terminal device 300. For example, if the image supplied from the terminal device 300 is a backlit image, the maintenance member performs maintenance work in a dazzling state. Maintenance work under bright conditions is inappropriate.
  • the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 can supply the terminal device 300 with information indicating the result of the determination by the work state appropriateness determination unit 424.
  • the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 can supply information to prompt the terminal device 300 to change the work state.
  • the display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 can display information for prompting the user to change the work status on the display unit 310 based on the information supplied from the management device 400.
  • the display control section 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. on the display section 310 to prompt the user to change the working state. For example, if an appropriate working state can be achieved by changing the position and orientation of the maintenance member, the display control unit 330 may display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the maintenance member to change the position and orientation. .
  • the display control unit 330 displays graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 for prompting a change in the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. may be displayed.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the audio information providing section 324.
  • the audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information for prompting a change in work status. For example, if an appropriate working state can be achieved by changing the position and orientation of the maintenance member, the audio information providing unit 324 may provide audio information for prompting the maintenance member to change the position and orientation. When an appropriate working state can be achieved by changing the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A, the audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information for prompting the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A to change its position and orientation.
  • the display control unit 330 can display on the display unit 310 information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A.
  • the display control unit 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work superimposed on the storage location.
  • the audio information providing unit 324 may provide audio information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work.
  • the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating storage locations of tools used during maintenance work.
  • a control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 stores, for example, information regarding the current position of the terminal device 300, an image acquired by an image acquisition unit 322 provided in the terminal device 300, and information used during maintenance work.
  • the control unit 408 Based on the information indicating the storage location of the tool, it can be determined whether the storage location is included in the image. If it is determined that the storage location is included in the image, the control unit 408 provides the terminal device 300 with information indicating the storage location.
  • the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 can display information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the display unit 310 based on the information supplied from the management device 400.
  • the management device 400 may include the position/orientation suitability determination unit 425.
  • the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 can determine suitability of position/posture, etc. during maintenance work.
  • the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 determines suitability of the position/posture during maintenance work based on appropriate position/posture information, which is information indicating an appropriate position/posture according to the maintenance work, and an image acquired by the imaging unit 306. It can be determined by Note that the appropriate position and orientation information is stored in the work information storage unit 433, as described above.
  • the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 may supply the terminal device 300 with information for prompting a change in the position/posture.
  • a display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 can display information for prompting a change in position and orientation on the display unit 310 based on information supplied from the management device 400.
  • the display control unit 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the user to change the position and orientation. For example, when the position and orientation of the maintenance member is inappropriate, the display control unit 330 may display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the maintenance member to change the position and orientation.
  • the display control unit 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 for prompting a change in the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. If the position and orientation of the component is inappropriate, the display control unit 330 may display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the user to change the position and orientation of the component.
  • the audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information for prompting changes in these positions and orientations.
  • FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S161 the image acquisition unit 322 included in the terminal device 300 acquires an image acquired by the imaging unit 306 included in the terminal device 300. After this, the process moves to step S162.
  • step S162 the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 provides the management device 400 with the image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322. After this, the process moves to step S163.
  • step S163 the moving object determination unit 417 included in the management device 400 determines whether the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image. If the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A is included in the image (YES in step S163), the process moves to step S164. If the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A is not included in the image (NO in step S163), the process shown in FIG. 28 is completed.
  • step S164 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image. After this, the process moves to step S165.
  • step S165 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays the image on the display unit 310, and displays a graphic corresponding to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A in a superimposed manner on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 28 is completed.
  • FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S171 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 provides the terminal device 300 with information indicating the maintenance target portion of the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S172.
  • step S172 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays the maintenance required moving object 100A including the maintenance target part on the display unit 310, and also displays a graphic indicating that the maintenance target part is the maintenance target part. superimposed on the image. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 29 is completed.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S181 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information indicating the content of the maintenance work for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S182.
  • step S182 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays the maintenance required moving body 100A including the maintenance target portion on the display unit 310, and the content of the maintenance work for the maintenance required moving body 100A. Information indicating the maintenance target area is displayed superimposed on the maintenance target area. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 30 is completed.
  • FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S191 the work state suitability determination unit 424 provided in the management device 400 determines the suitability of the work state during maintenance work. If the work state suitability determination unit 424 determines that the work state is inappropriate (YES in step S191), the process moves to step S192. When the work state suitability determination unit 424 determines that the work state is appropriate (NO in step S191), the process shown in FIG. 31 is completed.
  • step S192 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information for prompting a change in the work status. After this, the process moves to step S193.
  • step S193 the display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 displays information for prompting the user to change the working state on the display unit 310. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 31 is completed.
  • FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S201 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 provides the terminal device 300 with information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S202.
  • step S202 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 superimposes and displays on the display unit 310 information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 32 is completed.
  • FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S211 the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 provided in the management device 400 determines the suitability of the position/posture during maintenance work. If the position and orientation suitability determination unit 425 determines that the position and orientation are inappropriate (YES in step S211), the process moves to step S212. When the position and orientation suitability determination unit 425 determines that the position and orientation are appropriate (NO in step S211), the process shown in FIG. 33 is completed.
  • step S212 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information for prompting the change of position and orientation. After this, the process moves to step S213.
  • step S213 the display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 displays information on the display unit 310 to prompt the user to change the position and orientation. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 33 is completed.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
  • the management device 400 may include the setting section 440.
  • the setting unit 440 can set the management area 350.
  • the management area 350 is an area where management for providing maintenance to the mobile object 100 is performed.
  • the setting unit 440 can set a plurality of management areas 350, one management area 350 among the plurality of management areas 350 will be explained here as an example.
  • the setting unit 440 can set the management area 350 based on map information.
  • the map information may be stored in the map information storage unit 438 in advance. A part of the area (not shown) indicated by the map information may be set as the management area 350.
  • the management device 400 may include the determination unit 442.
  • the determining unit 442 may determine the location of the service location 352.
  • the service base 352 is a base that provides maintenance work for the mobile object 100.
  • the determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the service bases 352 are approximately evenly distributed within the management area 350. That is, the determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the distances between the service bases 352 are approximately equal. In other words, the determining unit 442 can determine the location of the service base 352 such that the maximum value of the access time to the nearest service base 352 is equal to or less than the predetermined maximum access time.
  • the user's access time to the nearest service base 352 is The location of the service base 352 is determined so that the access time is 10 minutes or less.
  • the access time can be calculated based on map information, but is not limited thereto. Information regarding access time may be linked to map information.
  • the determining unit 442 can determine the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 based on the maintenance demand in the management area 350.
  • Information regarding maintenance demand may be stored in storage unit 404 in advance.
  • Information regarding maintenance demand may be linked to map information in advance.
  • the determining unit 442 can set the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 to be relatively small.
  • the determining unit 442 can set the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 to be medium.
  • the determining unit 442 can set the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 to be relatively small.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
  • the determining unit 442 can determine the location of each service base 352 based on the services that the service base 352 can handle. For example, the determining unit 442 may appropriately arrange the advanced service base 352A and the non-sophisticated service base 352B.
  • the advanced service base 352A is a service base that can handle various tasks.
  • the non-advanced service base 352B is a service base that can only handle some tasks.
  • maintenance member information is stored in the maintenance member information storage unit 432 provided in the management device 400.
  • the maintenance member information may include available work information that is information regarding maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. Based on maintenance member information regarding maintenance members belonging to the service base 352, the services that the service base 352 can handle can be grasped.
  • the determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the non-advanced service bases 352B are not adjacent to each other. That is, the determining unit 442 can arrange the advanced service base 352A between one non-sophisticated service base 352B and another non-sophisticated service base 352B. Since the non-advanced service bases 352B can be prevented from being adjacent to each other, it can contribute to shortening the access time to the advanced service base 352A.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
  • the determining unit 442 can determine the location of each service location based on the operating hours of the service location. For example, the determining unit 442 can appropriately arrange the long-time service base 352C and the short-time service base 352D.
  • the long-time service base 352C is a service base with a relatively long operating time.
  • the short-time service base 352D is a service base whose operating time is relatively short.
  • maintenance member information is stored in the maintenance member information storage unit 432 provided in the management device 400.
  • the maintenance member information may include information regarding the maintenance member's operating hours. Based on maintenance member information regarding maintenance members belonging to the service base 352, the operating hours of the service base 352 can be grasped.
  • the determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the short-time service bases 352D are not adjacent to each other. That is, the determining unit 442 can arrange the long-time service base 352C between one short-time service base 352D and another short-time service base 352D. Since it is possible to prevent the short-time service bases 352D from being adjacent to each other, it contributes to improving convenience.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
  • the determining unit 442 can determine the location of the service base 352 so that the service base 352 is located at least in a low-altitude area 350L, which is a relatively low altitude location in the management area 350.
  • the map information may include information regarding the elevation of each location.
  • the determining unit 442 can grasp the low-elevation locations 350L in the management area 350 based on map information.
  • the determining unit 442 arranges the service base 352 at least at a low altitude location 350L. People tend to gather in areas with relatively low altitudes. For this reason, maintenance demand is relatively high in locations with relatively low altitudes.
  • the service base 352 may be located at least at the low altitude location 350L of the management area 350.
  • the management device 400 may include the correction unit 444.
  • the operation of the service bases 352 may be uneven. That is, the number of customers at each service base 352 may be uneven. At the service base 352 where the number of visitors is relatively large, it tends to take a relatively long time to complete maintenance. On the other hand, at the service base 352 where the number of visitors is relatively small, the time required to complete maintenance tends to be relatively short.
  • the correction unit 444 distributes information for customer referral to the mobile terminal 200 when the operation of the service base 352 is uneven.
  • the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can display information for customer referral on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200.
  • Information for sending customers may include, for example, information for encouraging the user to use the service base 352 where the number of customers is relatively small.
  • the correction unit 444 can extract a service base 352 with a relatively small number of visitors from among the plurality of service bases 352 located within a predetermined distance from the location of the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user.
  • the correction unit 444 can deliver information indicating the service base 352 extracted in this way to the mobile terminal 200.
  • the information for sending customers may be information indicating the number of customers at each service base 352.
  • the correction unit 444 may deliver information indicating the number of visitors at each service base 352 to the mobile terminal 200.
  • the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can display information indicating the number of visitors at each service base 352 on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200. Based on this information, the user can know which service bases 352 have a relatively small number of visitors. The information can encourage the use of the service base 352 where the number of visitors is relatively small.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S221 the setting unit 440 provided in the management device 400 sets the management area 350. After this, the process moves to step S222.
  • step S222 the determining unit 442 provided in the management device 400 determines that the service bases 352, which are bases that provide maintenance work for the mobile object 100, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area 350. The location of the service base 352 is determined. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 38 is completed.
  • FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S231 the setting unit 440 provided in the management device 400 sets the management area 350. After this, the process moves to step S232.
  • step S232 the determining unit 442 provided in the management device 400 determines the number of service locations 352 based on maintenance demand. After this, the process moves to step S233.
  • step S233 the determining unit 442 provided in the management device 400 determines that the service bases 352, which are bases that provide maintenance work for the mobile object 100, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area 350. The location of the service base 352 is determined. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 39 is completed.
  • FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S241 the setting unit 440 provided in the management device 400 sets the management area 350. After this, the process moves to step S242.
  • step S242 the determining unit 442 included in the management device 400 determines the low-elevation location 350L in the management area 350 based on the map information. After this, the process moves to step S243.
  • step S243 the determining unit 442 determines the position of the service base 352 so that the service base 352 is located at least at the low altitude location 350L. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 40 is completed.
  • FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S251 the correction unit 444 provided in the management device 400 determines whether or not a bias greater than or equal to a predetermined maldistribution threshold has occurred between the service locations 352. If a bias equal to or greater than a predetermined maldistribution threshold occurs between service locations 352 (YES in step S251), the process moves to step S252. If a bias equal to or greater than a predetermined maldistribution threshold does not occur among the service locations 352 (NO in step S251), the process shown in FIG. 41 is completed.
  • step S252 the correction unit 444 delivers information for customer referral to the mobile terminal 200. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 41 is completed.
  • the mobile terminal 200 and the terminal device 300 are capable of non-base station mediated wireless communication, which is wireless communication without the intervening base station 23 (see FIG. 1).
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the reception section 216.
  • the reception unit 216 can receive input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance required mobile object information may be input by the owner of the mobile terminal 200.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the maintenance required information providing unit 222.
  • the maintenance-required information providing unit 222 can perform the following processing based on the maintenance-required mobile object information received by the reception unit 216. That is, the maintenance required information providing unit 222 can provide the terminal device 300 with maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A through non-base station mediated wireless communication.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the display control section 330.
  • the display control unit 330 can display display information according to the required maintenance information on the display unit 310 provided in the terminal device 300.
  • the receiving unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can further receive input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can provide the malfunction content information to the terminal device 300 by non-base station mediated wireless communication.
  • the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information corresponding to the maintenance required information on the terminal device 300 based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. It can be displayed on a display section 310 provided in the.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may include the determination unit 227.
  • the determination unit 227 determines whether or not the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is capable of performing maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, based on information indicating maintenance work that the owner can perform and defect content information. It can be determined based on
  • the display control unit 226 included in the mobile terminal 200 can perform the following processing when the determination unit 227 determines that the owner can perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. In such a case, the display control unit 226 can display the required maintenance information for entrusting the maintenance work to the owner of the mobile terminal 200 on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200.
  • the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can provide maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 when the owner of the mobile terminal 200 refuses to accept maintenance work.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the incentive giving unit 445.
  • the incentive granting unit 445 can provide an incentive to the owner who performed the maintenance work. Examples of incentives include, but are not limited to, points. These points can be used for expenses when the owner rents the mobile object 100, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the input reception section 317.
  • the input receiving unit 317 can receive input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the providing unit 326.
  • the providing unit 326 can provide the maintenance required information to another terminal device (not shown) through non-base station mediated wireless communication based on the maintenance required mobile object information received by the input receiving unit 317.
  • the input receiving unit 317 provided in the terminal device 300 can receive input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the availability determination unit 331.
  • the availability determination unit 331 determines whether or not the owner of the terminal device 300 can perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, based on information indicating the maintenance work that the owner can handle and defect content information. The determination can be made based on the following.
  • the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 performs the following processing. can be done. That is, in such a case, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 transmits maintenance request information for requesting the owner of the terminal device 300 to perform maintenance work to the display unit 310 provided in the terminal device 300. can be displayed.
  • the incentive giving unit 445 provided in the management device 400 can give an incentive for providing information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • an incentive may be given to the owner of the mobile terminal 200.
  • an incentive can be given to the owner of the terminal device 300. Examples of incentives include, but are not limited to, points.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the information provider evaluation unit 456.
  • the information provider evaluation unit 456 can provide information provider evaluation information that is information indicating an evaluation of the information provider who provided information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. For example, if the accuracy of the information provided by the information provider is relatively low, the information provider evaluation unit 456 may set the evaluation of the information provider relatively low. When the accuracy of the information provided by the information provider is relatively high, the information provider evaluation unit 456 can set the evaluation of the information provider relatively high.
  • the incentive giving unit 445 may set the magnitude of the incentive according to the evaluation of the information provider in the information provider evaluation information.
  • FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S261 the receiving unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can receive input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance required mobile object information may be input by the owner of the mobile terminal 200. After this, the process moves to step S262.
  • step S262 the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides the terminal device 300 with maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A through non-base station mediated wireless communication. . After this, the process moves to step S263.
  • step S263 the display control section 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information corresponding to the maintenance required information on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 42 is completed.
  • FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S271 the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S272.
  • step S272 the receiving unit 216 further receives input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S273.
  • step S273 the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 transmits the maintenance required information for entrusting the maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A and the defect content information by non-base station mediated wireless communication.
  • the information is provided to the terminal device 300. After this, the process moves to step S274.
  • step S274 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information according to the maintenance required information based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that can be performed by the maintenance member. is displayed on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300.
  • FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S281 the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S282.
  • step S282 the receiving unit 216 further receives input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S283.
  • step S283 the determination unit 227 provided in the mobile terminal 200 determines whether the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the determination unit 227 can determine whether or not the owner of the mobile terminal 200 can perform the maintenance work based on the information indicating the maintenance work that the owner can handle and the defect content information. If the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (YES in step S283), the process moves to step S284. If the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is unable to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (NO in step S283), the process moves to step S285.
  • step S284 the display control unit 226 included in the mobile terminal 200 displays required maintenance information for entrusting the owner of the mobile terminal 200 with maintenance work on the maintenance required mobile object 100A. displayed on the display section 210.
  • step S285 the control unit 214 provided in the mobile terminal 200 determines whether or not the request for maintenance work has been rejected by the owner of the mobile terminal 200. Rejection of maintenance work may be performed by the owner of the mobile terminal 200 operating the operation screen displayed on the display unit 210. If the request for maintenance work is not rejected by the owner of the mobile terminal 200 (NO in step S285), the process shown in FIG. 44 is completed. If the owner of the mobile terminal 200 refuses to undertake maintenance work (YES in step S285), the process moves to step S286.
  • step S286 the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 transmits the maintenance required information for entrusting the maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A and the defect content information by non-base station mediated wireless communication.
  • the information is provided to the terminal device 300. After this, the process moves to step S287.
  • step S287 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information according to the maintenance required information based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that can be performed by the maintenance member. is displayed on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 44 is completed.
  • FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S291 the input receiving unit 317 provided in the terminal device 300 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S292.
  • step S292 the input receiving unit 317 further receives input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S293.
  • step S293 the availability determining unit 331 provided in the terminal device 300 determines whether the owner of the terminal device 300 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the availability determination unit 331 can determine whether or not the owner of the terminal device 300 can perform the maintenance work based on the information indicating the maintenance work that the owner can perform and the defect content information. If the owner of the terminal device 300 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (YES in step S293), the process moves to step S294. If the owner of the terminal device 300 is unable to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (NO in step S293), the process moves to step S295.
  • step S294 the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays maintenance request information for requesting the owner of the terminal device 300 to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. displayed on the display section 310.
  • step S295 the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 determines whether the request for maintenance work has been rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300.
  • the request for maintenance work may be rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300 operating the operation screen displayed on the display unit 310. If the request for maintenance work is not rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300 (NO in step S295), the process shown in FIG. 45 is completed. If the request for maintenance work is rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300 (YES in step S295), the process moves to step S296.
  • step S296 the providing unit 326 provided in the terminal device 300 transmits the maintenance required information for entrusting the maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A and the defect content information to other terminals via non-base station mediated wireless communication.
  • the information is provided to the device 300. After this, the process moves to step S297.
  • step S297 the display control unit 330 provided in the other terminal device 300 displays the information according to the maintenance required information based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle.
  • the display information is displayed on another display section 310 provided in the other terminal device 300. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 45 is completed.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the reception section 315.
  • the reception unit 315 can receive an input of a maintenance record (work record) that is a record regarding maintenance work performed by a maintenance member who owns the terminal device 300.
  • the maintenance record may include information regarding the person who performed maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance record may include information indicating the date and time of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance record may include information indicating the content of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance record may include information regarding parts (used parts) mounted on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance record may include information regarding the time required for maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance record may also include matters related to the maintenance. Note that maintenance records are not limited to these.
  • the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the maintenance record providing unit 328.
  • the maintenance record providing unit 328 can provide the management device 400 with the maintenance record accepted by the accepting unit 315.
  • the management device 400 may include the acquisition unit 446.
  • the acquisition unit 446 can acquire maintenance records provided from the terminal device 300.
  • the acquisition unit 446 can store the acquired maintenance records in the maintenance history storage unit 434.
  • the management device 400 may include the work evaluation section 448.
  • the work evaluation unit 448 can generate work evaluation information that is information indicating an evaluation of the maintenance work based on a maintenance record that is a record regarding the maintenance work and the result of the maintenance work.
  • the result of the maintenance work can be determined, for example, based on the period until the one mobile object 100 again requires the same maintenance work as the maintenance work performed on the one mobile object 100.
  • the period until the one moving body 100 requires maintenance work of the same content as the one maintenance work performed on the one moving body 100 is determined based on the maintenance history of the one moving body 100, for example. It can be understood that
  • the results of the maintenance work are, for example, the results of the maintenance work performed on the one mobile body 100 until the same maintenance work as the maintenance work performed on the one mobile body 100 is required again. It can be determined based on mileage. For example, the distance traveled by the moving object 100 until the moving object 100 requires the same maintenance work as the maintenance work performed on the moving object 100 is, for example, This can be determined based on the usage history of the mobile object 100.
  • the work evaluation unit 448 can generate work evaluation information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work based on the maintenance record and the result of the maintenance work.
  • the maintenance record may include information regarding parts (used parts) mounted on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
  • the maintenance record may include information regarding the time required for maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. That is, the maintenance record may include information indicating the cost of the maintenance work. Therefore, the work evaluation unit 448 can generate work evaluation information for the maintenance work based on information indicating the cost of the maintenance work and the results of the maintenance work.
  • the work evaluation unit 448 may store the work evaluation information generated by the work evaluation unit 448 in the maintenance member information storage unit 432 or the like.
  • the management device 400 may include the work standard generation unit 450.
  • the work standard generation unit 450 can adopt, as a work standard, maintenance work for which the evaluation indicated by the work evaluation information is equal to or higher than the evaluation standard. For example, maintenance work that provides relatively high durability despite being relatively low in cost has a relatively high work evaluation. On the other hand, maintenance work that has a relatively high cost but relatively low durability has a relatively low work evaluation. Maintenance operations that provide relatively high durability at relatively low cost may be adopted as a standard of practice. Maintenance tasks that have relatively high cost but relatively low durability are not adopted as standard practice.
  • the work standard generation unit 450 can generate work standards according to the region. For example, for the moving body 100 used in areas prone to salt damage, it may be a standard work to select parts that have been sufficiently rust-proofed. Whether or not the mobile object 100 is used in an area prone to salt damage can be determined based on the usage history of the mobile object 100, for example. For example, for the moving body 100 used in an area with many slopes, it may be a standard practice to select brake pads with sufficiently high durability. Whether or not the mobile object 100 is used in an area with many slopes can be determined based on the usage history of the mobile object 100, for example.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the member evaluation section 422.
  • the member evaluation unit 422 can generate member evaluation information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance member based on the above-mentioned work evaluation information.
  • the work evaluation information is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work.
  • the member evaluation unit 422 can determine the level of member evaluation according to the level of evaluation in the work evaluation information, but is not limited thereto.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the remuneration determining unit 451.
  • the remuneration determination unit 451 may determine the remuneration of the maintenance member based on the member evaluation information generated by the member evaluation unit 422. For example, the remuneration determination unit 451 can determine the height of the remuneration according to the evaluation level in the member evaluation information, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the management device 400 may include the work standard information providing unit 452.
  • the work standard information providing unit 452 can provide information regarding work standards. More specifically, the work standard information providing unit 452 may provide information regarding the work standard to those who are not maintenance members, for example, for a fee.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the consideration determination unit 454.
  • the compensation determination unit 454 can determine the compensation for the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452 according to the data amount of the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452. When the data amount of the information is relatively large, the compensation for providing the information can be set relatively high. Further, the consideration determining unit 454 can determine the consideration for the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452 according to the amount of data required to generate the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452. If the amount of data required to generate the information is relatively large, the price for providing the information can be set relatively high.
  • FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S301 the receiving unit 315 provided in the terminal device 300 receives input of a maintenance record that is a record regarding maintenance work performed by a maintenance member. After this, the process moves to step S302.
  • step S302 the maintenance record providing unit 328 provided in the terminal device 300 provides the management device 400 with the maintenance record accepted by the receiving unit 315. After this, the process moves to step S303.
  • step S303 the work evaluation unit 448 provided in the management device 400 performs work evaluation, which is an evaluation of the maintenance work, based on the maintenance record and the results of the maintenance work. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 46 is completed.
  • work evaluation information which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work
  • Work evaluation information can be used to set work standards. Setting work standards can contribute to good management of the mobile body 100.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may include the control unit 214.
  • the control unit 214 can acquire identification information of the mobile body 100 to which malfunction content information, which is information indicating the content of the malfunction occurring in the mobile body 100, is provided.
  • the identification information of the mobile object 100 may be acquired by the mobile terminal 200 reading the identification information presented by the information presentation unit 110 provided in the mobile object 100, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the identification information of the mobile object 100 may be input by the user operating an input screen displayed on the mobile terminal 200.
  • the control unit 214 can provide the management device 400 with the identification information acquired in this way.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the mobile information storage section 428.
  • the mobile body information storage unit 428 may store mobile body information that is information regarding each mobile body 100.
  • the mobile object information may include defect content information indicating the details of the problem occurring in the mobile object 100.
  • the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 can acquire defect content information regarding the mobile unit 100 corresponding to the identification information provided from the mobile terminal 200 from the mobile unit information storage unit 428.
  • the control unit 408 can supply the defect content information to the mobile terminal 200.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the information providing section 228.
  • the information providing unit 228 can provide the user with defect content information corresponding to the mobile object 100.
  • the information providing unit 228 may display the defect content information on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200, but is not limited thereto.
  • the information providing unit 228 may provide defect information to the user by voice.
  • FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
  • FIG. 47 shows an example of a state in which defect content information is displayed on the display screen 230.
  • the display control unit 226 can display a display screen 230 on the display unit 210.
  • the display control unit 226 can display the image acquired by the image acquisition unit 224 on the display screen 230. If the image includes the moving object 100 for which defect content information is to be provided, the display control unit 226 displays a figure (symbol, mark) 232 according to the defect content information corresponding to the moving object 100. It can be displayed superimposed on the moving body 100.
  • the figure 232 may be, for example, a circle or an ellipse surrounding the defective component, but is not limited thereto.
  • the graphic 232 may be a graphic corresponding to the outer shape of the component in which the problem occurs.
  • the display control unit 226 can display the graphic 232 and also display text information 233 indicating the content of the problem on the display screen 230.
  • the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the reception section 216.
  • the reception unit 216 can receive input of malfunction content information that is information regarding the content of a malfunction occurring in the mobile object 100.
  • the defect content information may be input by a user who owns the mobile terminal 200.
  • the malfunction content information may be input by, for example, a user using the mobile object 100, but is not limited thereto.
  • the problem may include, for example, that the saddle is dirty. Further, the problem may include difficulty in adjusting the height of the saddle. Furthermore, the content of the malfunction may include that the saddle is out of order. Furthermore, the problem may include low tire air pressure. Moreover, the content of the malfunction may include a tire blowout. Furthermore, the problem may include abnormal noises coming from the brakes. In addition, the details of the malfunction include poor brake effectiveness. Moreover, the content of the malfunction may include that the brakes do not work. Note that the contents of the malfunction are not limited to these.
  • the storage unit 404 provided in the management device 400 may include the mobile information storage unit 428.
  • Mobile object information can be stored in the mobile object information storage section 428.
  • the mobile object information may include defect content information.
  • the defect content information received by the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can be provided from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 400.
  • the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 can update the defect content information stored in the storage unit 404 based on the defect content information received by the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200. More specifically, the control unit 408 can update the malfunction content information stored in the mobile object information storage unit 428 based on the malfunction content information accepted by the receiving unit 216.
  • the management device 400 may be equipped with the reservation reception section 410, as described above.
  • the reservation accepting unit 410 can limit reservations for use of the mobile object 100 based on the defect content information.
  • FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
  • step S311 the control unit 214 provided in the mobile terminal 200 acquires the identification information of the mobile object 100 to which the defect content information is to be provided. After this, the process moves to step S312.
  • step S312 the control unit 214 supplies the management device 400 with the identification information of the mobile object 100 to which the defect content information is to be provided. After this, the process moves to step S313.
  • step S313 the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 reads defect content information corresponding to the identification information from the mobile object information storage unit 428. After this, the process moves to step S314.
  • step S314 the control unit 408 supplies the defect content information to the mobile terminal 200. After this, the process moves to step S315.
  • step S315 the information providing unit 228 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides malfunction content information to the user who owns the mobile terminal 200. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 48 is completed.
  • malfunction content information regarding the mobile object 100 can be provided, so that the user can decide whether or not to use the mobile object 100 before starting to use the mobile object 100. can be done. According to this embodiment, it is possible to contribute to user convenience.
  • the determination unit 416 is included in the management device 400 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the determination unit 416 may be included in the mobile terminal 200.
  • the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 is provided in the management device 400 as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the position/orientation suitability determination unit 425 may be included in the terminal device 300.
  • the work state suitability determination unit 424 is provided in the management device 400 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the work state suitability determination unit 424 may be included in the terminal device 300.
  • the work information storage section 433 is provided in the management device 400 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the work information storage section 433 may be included in the terminal device 300.
  • the management system (10) is a management system for managing a mobile object (100) shared by users, and includes a setting section (440) for setting a management area (350) and a maintenance work for the mobile object. and a determination unit (442) that determines the location of the service bases so that the service bases (352), which are bases that provide services, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the moving distance of the moving object from becoming excessively long in order to receive maintenance work.
  • the determining unit may determine the number of service bases within the management area based on maintenance demand in the management area. According to such a configuration, maintenance of the moving body can be performed satisfactorily.
  • the determining unit may determine the location of each service base based on the services that the service base can handle.
  • the determining unit may determine the location of each service base based on the operating hours of the service base. According to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the time during which maintenance work cannot be provided.
  • the determining unit determines the location of the service base so that the service base is located at least at a low elevation location (350L) that is a relatively low elevation location in the management area. may be determined.
  • the above management system further includes a mobile terminal owned by the user, and when the operation of the service base is uneven, information for customer referral is distributed to the mobile terminal to improve the operation. It may further include a correction unit (444) for correcting bias.
  • the management method is a management method for managing mobile bodies shared by users, and includes a step of setting a management area (S221), and a service base that is a base that provides maintenance work for the mobile body. determining the positions of the service bases so that they are approximately evenly distributed within the management area (S222).
  • Management system 12 Sharing system 22: Rental port 23: Base station 24: Network 29: Management center 30: Management machine 38: Port lock mechanism 100: Mobile object 100A: Mobile object requiring maintenance 100B: Available mobile object 102 , 202, 202A, 302, 402: Arithmetic unit 104, 204, 204A, 304, 404: Storage unit 105, 205, 311: Positioning unit 106: Lock mechanism 108: Battery 110: Information presentation unit 111: Inter-mobile communication unit 112, 212, 212A, 312, 406: Communication section 114, 214, 214A, 314, 408: Control section 116: Usage restriction information acquisition section 118: Usage restriction section 122: Reservation transfer section 124, 329: Location information acquisition section 126 : Authentication unit 128: Data acquisition unit 200: Mobile terminal 200A: Mobile communication terminal 206, 206A, 306: Imaging unit 208, 208A, 308: Operation unit 210, 210A, 310: Display unit 216, 315:

Landscapes

  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Human Resources & Organizations (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Economics (AREA)
  • Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
  • Marketing (AREA)
  • Operations Research (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • Tourism & Hospitality (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)

Abstract

A management system (10) for managing a mobile object (100) shared by users comprises a setting unit (440) that sets a management region, and a decision unit (442) that decides the positions of service sites, which are sites for providing maintenance work to the mobile object, such that the service sites are distributed substantially evenly within the management region.

Description

管理システム及び管理方法Management system and management method
　本発明は、管理システム及び管理方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a management system and a management method.
　特開２０１６－１２２９１号公報には、シェアリング用の複数の自転車と、所定台数の自転車を停めることが可能な複数の駐輪エリアと、各々の駐輪エリアに設置された管理装置とを含む移動体シェアリングシステムが開示されている。 JP 2016-12291 A includes a plurality of bicycles for sharing, a plurality of bicycle parking areas where a predetermined number of bicycles can be parked, and a management device installed in each bicycle parking area. A mobile sharing system is disclosed.
　近時では、複数のユーザによってシェアされる移動体をより良好に管理し得る技術が待望されている。 Recently, there has been a long-awaited technology that can better manage mobile objects shared by multiple users.
　本発明は、上述した課題を解決することを目的とする。 The present invention aims to solve the above-mentioned problems.
　本発明の一態様による管理システムは、ユーザによってシェアされる移動体を管理する管理システムであって、管理区域を設定する設定部と、前記移動体に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点が、前記管理区域内に略均等に配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の位置を決定する決定部と、を備える。 A management system according to one aspect of the present invention is a management system that manages mobile objects shared by users, and includes a setting unit that sets a management area, and a base that provides maintenance work for the mobile object. A determining unit is provided that determines the positions of the service bases so that the service bases are approximately evenly arranged within the management area.
　本発明の他の態様による管理方法は、ユーザによってシェアされる移動体を管理する管理方法であって、管理区域を設定するステップと、前記移動体に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点が、前記管理区域内に略均等に配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の位置を決定するステップと、を有する。 A management method according to another aspect of the present invention is a management method for managing a mobile body shared by users, which includes the steps of setting a management area and a base for providing maintenance work for the mobile body. determining the positions of the service bases so that the service bases are approximately evenly distributed within the management area.
　本発明によれば、複数のユーザによってシェアされる移動体を良好に管理し得る管理システム及び管理方法を提供し得る。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a management system and a management method that can effectively manage mobile objects shared by multiple users.
図１は、一実施形態による管理システムの例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an example management system according to one embodiment. 図２Ａは、移動体の例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile object. 図２Ｂは、携帯端末の例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile terminal. 図２Ｃは、端末装置の例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2C is a block diagram illustrating an example of a terminal device. 図２Ｄは、管理装置の例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2D is a block diagram illustrating an example of a management device. 図３は、一実施形態によるシェアリングシステムの例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a sharing system according to one embodiment. 図４は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図５は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図６は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図７は、携帯通信端末の例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an example of a mobile communication terminal. 図８は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図９は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to one embodiment. 図１０は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図１１は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図１２は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図１３は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図１４は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図１５は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図１６は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図１７は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図１８は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図１９は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図２０は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図２１は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図２２は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図２３は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図２４は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図２５は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図２６は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図２７は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図２８は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図２９は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図３０は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図３１は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図３２は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図３３は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図３４は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases. 図３５は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service locations. 図３６は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service locations. 図３７は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service locations. 図３８は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図３９は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４０は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４１は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４２は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４３は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４４は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４５は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４６は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment. 図４７は、表示画面の例を示す図である。FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. 図４８は、一実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of a management system according to one embodiment.
　［一実施形態］
　一実施形態による管理システム及び管理方法について図面を用いて説明する。図１は、本実施形態による管理システムの例を示すブロック図である。図２Ａは、移動体の例を示すブロック図である。図２Ｂは、携帯端末の例を示すブロック図である。図２Ｃは、端末装置の例を示すブロック図である。図２Ｄは、管理装置の例を示すブロック図である。図３は、本実施形態によるシェアリングシステムの例を示すブロック図である。 [One embodiment]
A management system and a management method according to an embodiment will be described using drawings. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a management system according to this embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile object. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an example of a mobile terminal. FIG. 2C is a block diagram illustrating an example of a terminal device. FIG. 2D is a block diagram illustrating an example of a management device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a sharing system according to this embodiment.
　図１に示すように、本実施形態による管理システム１０には、携帯端末２００と、端末装置３００と、管理装置４００とが含まれ得るが、これに限定されない。管理システム１０は、複数のユーザによってシェアされる移動体１００を管理する。また、管理システム１０は、移動体１００に対してのメンテナンスを管理し得る。メンテナンスには、点検、充電、清掃、整備、移動等が含まれ得るが、これに限定されない。充電には、バッテリ交換等が含まれるが、これに限定されない。整備には、修理、部品交換等が含まれるが、これに限定されない。移動体１００と、携帯端末２００と、端末装置３００と、管理装置４００とは、インターネット等のネットワーク２４に接続され得る。管理システム１０は複数の移動体１００を管理するが、図１においては、複数の移動体１００のうちの１つの移動体１００が図示されている。管理システム１０には、複数の携帯端末２００が含まれ得るが、図１においては、複数の携帯端末２００のうちの１つの携帯端末２００が図示されている。管理システム１０には、複数の端末装置３００が含まれ得るが、図１においては、複数の端末装置３００のうちの１つの端末装置３００が図示されている。 As shown in FIG. 1, the management system 10 according to the present embodiment may include a mobile terminal 200, a terminal device 300, and a management device 400, but is not limited thereto. The management system 10 manages a mobile object 100 shared by multiple users. Furthermore, the management system 10 can manage maintenance for the mobile object 100. Maintenance may include, but is not limited to, inspection, charging, cleaning, servicing, moving, etc. Charging includes, but is not limited to, battery replacement. Maintenance includes, but is not limited to, repairs, parts replacement, etc. The mobile object 100, the mobile terminal 200, the terminal device 300, and the management device 400 can be connected to a network 24 such as the Internet. The management system 10 manages a plurality of mobile bodies 100, and in FIG. 1, one mobile body 100 among the plurality of mobile bodies 100 is illustrated. Although the management system 10 may include a plurality of mobile terminals 200, one mobile terminal 200 among the plurality of mobile terminals 200 is illustrated in FIG. Although the management system 10 may include a plurality of terminal devices 300, one terminal device 300 among the plurality of terminal devices 300 is illustrated in FIG.
　図３に示すように、移動体１００は、シェアリングシステム１２において用いられ得る。移動体１００は、本実施形態によるシェアリングシステム１２を運営する運営事業者から各々のユーザ（利用者）に貸し出され得る。また、移動体１００は、複数のユーザ間で共有され得る。 As shown in FIG. 3, the mobile object 100 can be used in the sharing system 12. The mobile object 100 can be lent to each user from an operator that operates the sharing system 12 according to this embodiment. Furthermore, the mobile object 100 may be shared among multiple users.
　シェアリングシステム１２は、貸し出しポート（ステーション、サイクルポート）２２を含む。貸し出しポート２２は、シェアリングシステム１２を運営する運営事業者によって設置され得る。複数の貸し出しポート２２が、街中の様々な場所に設けられ得る。例えば、鉄道の駅の近隣地、幹線道路の近隣地、商業施設の近隣地等に貸し出しポート２２が設けられ得るが、これに限定されない。各々の貸し出しポート２２には、複数の移動体１００が駐車され得る。 The sharing system 12 includes a rental port (station, cycle port) 22. The rental port 22 may be installed by an operator that operates the sharing system 12. Multiple rental ports 22 may be provided at various locations throughout the city. For example, the rental port 22 may be provided near a railway station, near a main road, near a commercial facility, etc., but is not limited thereto. A plurality of mobile objects 100 can be parked at each rental port 22.
　ユーザは、シェアリングシステム１２に対してユーザ登録を行い得る。ユーザに関する情報であるユーザ情報が、シェアリングシステム１２に登録され得る。ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザに対して付与された識別情報であるユーザ識別情報が含まれ得る。ユーザ情報は、管理装置４００に備えられた後述するユーザ情報記憶部４２６に格納され得る。管理装置４００に格納されるユーザ識別情報は、登録識別情報とも称され得る。 A user can register for the sharing system 12. User information, which is information related to users, can be registered in the sharing system 12. The user information may include user identification information that is identification information given to the user. The user information may be stored in a user information storage unit 426 provided in the management device 400 and described later. The user identification information stored in the management device 400 may also be referred to as registered identification information.
　シェアリングシステム１２に登録したユーザは、移動体１００の利用を申請し得る。即ち、ユーザは、移動体１００の利用予約を行い得る。ユーザは、移動体１００の利用を申請した後、貸し出しポート２２に赴き、移動体１００を受け取り得る。ユーザは、移動体１００の利用が完了した後、当該移動体１００を貸し出しポート２２に返却し得る。返却先となる貸し出しポート２２は、当該移動体１００を受け取った貸し出しポート２２であってもよいし、当該移動体１００を受け取った貸し出しポート２２とは異なる貸し出しポート２２であってもよい。 Users registered in the sharing system 12 can apply to use the mobile object 100. That is, the user can make a reservation for use of the mobile object 100. After applying for use of the mobile object 100, the user can go to the rental port 22 and receive the mobile object 100. After the user completes using the mobile object 100, the user can return the mobile object 100 to the rental port 22. The rental port 22 to which the mobile object 100 is returned may be the rental port 22 that received the mobile object 100, or it may be a rental port 22 that is different from the rental port 22 that received the mobile object 100.
　シェアリングシステム１２には、管理機３０が含まれ得るが、これに限定されない。管理機３０は、各々の貸し出しポート２２に備えられ得る。管理機３０は、当該貸し出しポート２２に配される移動体１００を管理し得る。管理機３０には、プロセッサ、メモリ、入出力インターフェース等を含むコンピュータが備えられ得る。また、管理機３０には、通信モジュールが更に備えられ得る。管理機３０は、インターネット等のネットワーク２４に接続され得る。管理機３０は、ポートロック機構３８の動作を制御し得る。移動体１００を貸し出す際には、管理機３０は、当該移動体１００をロックしていたポートロック機構３８のロックを所定時間だけ解除し得る。また、移動体１００が返却された際には、管理機３０は、ポートロック機構３８を制御することによって当該移動体１００をロックし得る。管理機３０は、貸し出しポート２２に配されている移動体１００から供給される情報である移動体情報を取得し得る。かかる移動体情報には、当該移動体１００の識別情報である移動体識別情報が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に備えられたバッテリ１０８の残容量（バッテリ残量）等が含まれ得る。管理機３０は、取得した移動体情報を管理装置４００に送信し得る。 The sharing system 12 may include a management machine 30, but is not limited to this. A management machine 30 may be provided at each rental port 22. The management device 30 can manage the mobile object 100 placed at the rental port 22. The management machine 30 may include a computer including a processor, memory, input/output interface, and the like. Moreover, the management machine 30 may further include a communication module. The management machine 30 can be connected to a network 24 such as the Internet. The management machine 30 can control the operation of the port lock mechanism 38. When renting out the mobile object 100, the management machine 30 can unlock the port lock mechanism 38 that has locked the mobile object 100 for a predetermined period of time. Further, when the mobile body 100 is returned, the management machine 30 can lock the mobile body 100 by controlling the port lock mechanism 38. The management machine 30 can acquire mobile object information that is information supplied from the mobile object 100 located at the rental port 22. Such mobile body information may include mobile body identification information that is identification information of the mobile body 100. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include the remaining capacity (remaining battery amount) of the battery 108 provided in the mobile object 100, and the like. The management device 30 can transmit the acquired mobile object information to the management device 400.
　移動体１００は、複数のユーザによってシェアされ得る。移動体１００としては、例えば電動自転車等が挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。 The mobile object 100 can be shared by multiple users. Examples of the mobile object 100 include, but are not limited to, an electric bicycle.
　図２Ａに示すように、移動体１００には、演算部１０２と、記憶部１０４と、測位部１０５、ロック機構１０６と、バッテリ１０８と、情報提示部１１０と、移動体間通信部１１１と、通信部１１２とが備えられ得る。なお、移動体１００には、これらの構成要素以外の構成要素も備えられ得るが、ここでは説明を省略する。移動体１００には、後述するように、本実施形態による管理方法等をコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムが予めインストールされ得る。 As shown in FIG. 2A, the mobile body 100 includes a calculation unit 102, a storage unit 104, a positioning unit 105, a lock mechanism 106, a battery 108, an information presentation unit 110, an inter-mobile body communication unit 111, A communication unit 112 may be provided. Note that the mobile body 100 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here. As described later, a program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance in the mobile body 100.
　演算部１０２は、例えば、ＣＰＵ（Ｃｅｎｔｒａｌ　Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｕｎｉｔ）、ＧＰＵ（Ｇｒａｐｈｉｃｓ　Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｕｎｉｔ）等のプロセッサ（ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｏｒ）によって構成され得る。即ち、演算部１０２は、処理回路（ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　ｃｉｒｃｕｉｔｒｙ）によって構成され得る。 The calculation unit 102 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit). That is, the calculation unit 102 may be configured by a processing circuit.
　演算部１０２には、制御部１１４と、利用制限情報取得部１１６と、利用制限部１１８と、予約移管部１２２と、位置情報取得部１２４と、認証部１２６と、データ取得部１２８とが備えられ得る。制御部１１４は、移動体１００の全体の制御を司る。制御部１１４と、利用制限情報取得部１１６と、利用制限部１１８と、予約移管部１２２と、位置情報取得部１２４と、認証部１２６と、データ取得部１２８とは、記憶部１０４に記憶されているプログラムが演算部１０２によって実行されることによって実現され得る。 The calculation unit 102 includes a control unit 114, a usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, a usage restriction unit 118, a reservation transfer unit 122, a location information acquisition unit 124, an authentication unit 126, and a data acquisition unit 128. It can be done. The control unit 114 is in charge of overall control of the mobile body 100. The control unit 114, the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, the usage restriction unit 118, the reservation transfer unit 122, the location information acquisition unit 124, the authentication unit 126, and the data acquisition unit 128 are stored in the storage unit 104. This can be realized by executing a program by the arithmetic unit 102.
　なお、制御部１１４、利用制限情報取得部１１６、利用制限部１１８、予約移管部１２２、位置情報取得部１２４、認証部１２６、データ取得部１２８の少なくとも一部が、ＡＳＩＣ（Ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｃ　Ｉｎｔｅｇｒａｔｅｄ　Ｃｉｒｃｕｉｔ）、ＦＰＧＡ（Ｆｉｅｌｄ－Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍａｂｌｅ　Ｇａｔｅ　Ａｒｒａｙ）等の集積回路によって実現されてもよい。また、制御部１１４、利用制限情報取得部１１６、利用制限部１１８、予約移管部１２２、位置情報取得部１２４、認証部１２６、データ取得部１２８の少なくとも一部が、ディスクリートデバイスを含む電子回路によって構成されてもよい。 Note that at least a part of the control unit 114, usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, usage restriction unit 118, reservation transfer unit 122, location information acquisition unit 124, authentication unit 126, and data acquisition unit 128 is an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit). , an integrated circuit such as an FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array). Further, at least a part of the control unit 114, usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, usage restriction unit 118, reservation transfer unit 122, location information acquisition unit 124, authentication unit 126, and data acquisition unit 128 is implemented by an electronic circuit including a discrete device. may be configured.
　記憶部１０４には、不図示の揮発性メモリと、不図示の不揮発性メモリとが備えられ得る。揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＡＭ（Ｒａｎｄｏｍ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）等が挙げられ得る。不揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＯＭ（Ｒｅａｄ　Ｏｎｌｙ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられ得る。データ等が、例えば揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。プログラム、テーブル、マップ等が、例えば不揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。記憶部１０４の少なくとも一部が、上述したようなプロセッサ、集積回路等に備えられていてもよい。 The storage unit 104 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of the volatile memory include RAM (Random Access Memory). Examples of the nonvolatile memory include ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 104 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
　測位部１０５には、ＧＮＳＳ（Ｇｌｏｂａｌ　Ｎａｖｉｇａｔｉｏｎ　Ｓａｔｅｌｌｉｔｅ　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ、全地球航法衛星システム）センサが備えられ得る。当該ＧＮＳＳセンサは、移動体１００の現在の位置を示す位置情報を、衛星測位システムを利用して取得し得る。測位部１０５によって取得された位置情報は、後述する位置情報取得部１２４に供給され得る。位置情報取得部１２４は、測位部１０５から供給される位置情報を取得し得る。位置情報取得部１２４は、測位部１０５から供給される位置情報を、通信部１１２を介して管理装置４００等に供給し得る。 The positioning unit 105 may be equipped with a GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) sensor. The GNSS sensor can obtain position information indicating the current position of the mobile object 100 using a satellite positioning system. The position information acquired by the positioning unit 105 may be supplied to a position information acquisition unit 124, which will be described later. The position information acquisition unit 124 can acquire position information supplied from the positioning unit 105. The location information acquisition unit 124 can supply the location information supplied from the positioning unit 105 to the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 112.
　ロック機構１０６は、移動体１００に対する施解錠を行い得る。ロック機構１０６を施錠状態に設定すると、当該ロック機構１０６は、移動体１００に備えられた車輪の回転を規制し得る。一方、ロック機構１０６を解錠状態に設定すると、当該ロック機構１０６は、車輪の回転を許容し得る。ロック機構１０６は、後述する利用制限部１１８によって制御され得る。 The locking mechanism 106 can lock and unlock the moving body 100. When the lock mechanism 106 is set to the locked state, the lock mechanism 106 can restrict rotation of the wheels provided on the moving body 100. On the other hand, when the lock mechanism 106 is set to the unlocked state, the lock mechanism 106 can allow the wheels to rotate. The lock mechanism 106 can be controlled by a use restriction unit 118, which will be described later.
　移動体１００は、バッテリ１０８等から供給される電力を用いて不図示の駆動源を駆動させることで、アシスト走行等を行い得る。バッテリ１０８は、シェアリングシステム１２を提供する事業者等によって提供され得るが、これに限定されない。バッテリ１０８の交換等は、後述するメンテナンスメンバー等によって行われ得るが、これに限定されない。 The mobile object 100 can perform assisted travel or the like by driving a drive source (not shown) using electric power supplied from the battery 108 or the like. The battery 108 can be provided by a business that provides the sharing system 12, but is not limited thereto. Replacement of the battery 108, etc. may be performed by a maintenance member or the like, which will be described later, but is not limited thereto.
　上述したように、移動体１００には、情報提示部１１０が備えられ得る。情報提示部１１０は、携帯端末２００、端末装置３００等によって読み取り可能である。情報提示部１１０は、情報を提示し得る。より具体的には、情報提示部１１０は、当該情報提示部１１０が備えられた移動体１００を識別するための識別情報を提示し得る。情報提示部１１０によって提示される識別情報に基づいて移動体１００が特定され得る。情報提示部１１０は、例えば移動体１００のボディに備えられ得るが、これに限定されない。移動体１００に備えられた部品に情報提示部１１０が備えられていてもよい。情報提示部１１０は、シール等によって構成され得るが、これに限定されない。移動体１００のボディ等に情報提示部１１０が印刷されてもよい。また、移動体１００に備えられた部品等に情報提示部１１０が印刷されてもよい。 As described above, the mobile object 100 may be equipped with the information presentation section 110. The information presentation unit 110 can be read by the mobile terminal 200, the terminal device 300, etc. The information presenting unit 110 can present information. More specifically, the information presentation section 110 can present identification information for identifying the mobile object 100 equipped with the information presentation section 110. The mobile object 100 can be identified based on the identification information presented by the information presenting section 110. The information presentation unit 110 may be included in the body of the mobile object 100, for example, but is not limited thereto. The information presentation unit 110 may be included in a component included in the moving body 100. The information presentation unit 110 may be configured by a sticker or the like, but is not limited to this. The information presentation section 110 may be printed on the body of the moving object 100 or the like. Furthermore, the information presentation section 110 may be printed on a component or the like provided in the moving body 100.
　情報提示部１１０によって提示される情報である提示情報には、例えば、当該移動体１００の管理番号等が含まれ得る。例えば、当該移動体１００の管理番号を示す文字情報等が、当該情報提示部１１０に備えられ得る。また、情報提示部１１０には、例えば、ＱＲコード（登録商標）等が備えられ得る。かかるＱＲコード（登録商標）は、携帯端末２００、端末装置３００等によって読み取られ得る。 The presentation information, which is the information presented by the information presentation unit 110, may include, for example, the management number of the mobile object 100. For example, the information presentation unit 110 may include character information indicating the management number of the mobile object 100. Further, the information presentation unit 110 may be equipped with, for example, a QR code (registered trademark). Such a QR code (registered trademark) can be read by the mobile terminal 200, the terminal device 300, etc.
　通信部１１２は、無線通信等を行い得る。通信部１１２は、基地局（中継局）２３とネットワーク２４とを介して無線通信を行い得る。移動体１００は、当該移動体１００に備えられた通信部１１２と、ネットワーク２４とを介して、管理装置４００等にアクセスし得る。また、通信部１１２は、例えば、無線ＬＡＮを用いた通信をも行い得る。より具体的には、通信部１１２は、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）規格等に基づく無線通信をも行い得る。通信部１１２には、不図示の近距離無線通信モジュールが備えられ得る。近距離無線通信モジュールとしては、例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）規格に対応した通信モジュールが用いられ得るが、これに限定されない。 The communication unit 112 can perform wireless communication and the like. The communication unit 112 can perform wireless communication via the base station (relay station) 23 and the network 24. The mobile body 100 can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 112 provided in the mobile body 100 and the network 24. Furthermore, the communication unit 112 can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 112 can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like. The communication unit 112 may include a short-range wireless communication module (not shown). As the short-range wireless communication module, for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
　携帯端末２００は、シェアリングシステム１２を利用するユーザによって所持され得る。携帯端末２００としては、例えば、携帯型の電子機器等が挙げられ得る。かかる携帯型の電子機器としては、例えばスマートフォン等が挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。携帯端末２００が、タブレット端末、ウェアラブル端末等であってもよい。携帯端末２００には、シェアリングシステム１２を利用するためのアプリケーションソフトウェアがインストールされ得る。 The mobile terminal 200 may be possessed by a user who uses the sharing system 12. For example, the mobile terminal 200 may be a portable electronic device. Examples of such portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, smartphones. The mobile terminal 200 may be a tablet terminal, a wearable terminal, or the like. Application software for using the sharing system 12 may be installed on the mobile terminal 200.
　図２Ｂに示すように、携帯端末２００には、演算部２０２と、記憶部２０４と、測位部２０５と、撮像部２０６と、操作部２０８と、表示部２１０と、通信部２１２とが備えられ得る。また、携帯端末２００には、不図示のスピーカ、不図示のマイク等が更に備えられ得る。なお、携帯端末２００には、これらの構成要素以外の構成要素も備えられ得るが、ここでは説明を省略する。携帯端末２００には、後述するように、本実施形態による管理方法等をコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムが予めインストールされ得る。 As shown in FIG. 2B, the mobile terminal 200 includes a calculation section 202, a storage section 204, a positioning section 205, an imaging section 206, an operation section 208, a display section 210, and a communication section 212. obtain. Furthermore, the mobile terminal 200 may further include a speaker (not shown), a microphone (not shown), and the like. Note that the mobile terminal 200 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here. As described later, a program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance on the mobile terminal 200.
　演算部２０２は、例えば、ＣＰＵ、ＧＰＵ等のプロセッサによって構成され得る。即ち、演算部２０２は、処理回路によって構成され得る。 The calculation unit 202 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU or GPU, for example. That is, the calculation unit 202 may be configured by a processing circuit.
　演算部２０２には、制御部２１４と、受付部２１６と、利用制限情報提供部２１８と、要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０と、要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２と、画像取得部２２４と、不具合内容判定部２２５と、表示制御部２２６と、判定部２２７と、情報提供部２２８とが備えられ得る。制御部２１４は、携帯端末２００の全体の制御を司る。表示制御部２２６は、表示部２１０の画面表示の制御を司る。制御部２１４と、受付部２１６と、利用制限情報提供部２１８と、要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０と、要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２と、画像取得部２２４と、不具合内容判定部２２５と、表示制御部２２６と、判定部２２７と、情報提供部２２８とは、記憶部２０４に記憶されているプログラムが演算部２０２によって実行されることによって実現され得る。 The calculation unit 202 includes a control unit 214, a reception unit 216, a usage restriction information provision unit 218, a maintenance required mobile object information provision unit 220, a maintenance required information provision unit 222, an image acquisition unit 224, and a malfunction content information provision unit 224. A determination section 225, a display control section 226, a determination section 227, and an information provision section 228 may be provided. Control unit 214 manages overall control of mobile terminal 200. The display control unit 226 controls the screen display of the display unit 210. A control unit 214, a reception unit 216, a usage restriction information provision unit 218, a maintenance required mobile object information provision unit 220, a maintenance required information provision unit 222, an image acquisition unit 224, a malfunction content determination unit 225, and a display. The control unit 226, the determination unit 227, and the information providing unit 228 can be realized by the calculation unit 202 executing a program stored in the storage unit 204.
　なお、制御部２１４、受付部２１６、利用制限情報提供部２１８、要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０、要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２、画像取得部２２４、不具合内容判定部２２５、表示制御部２２６、判定部２２７、情報提供部２２８の少なくとも一部が、ＡＳＩＣ、ＦＰＧＡ等の集積回路によって実現されてもよい。また、制御部２１４、受付部２１６、利用制限情報提供部２１８、要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０、要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２、画像取得部２２４、不具合内容判定部２２５、表示制御部２２６、判定部２２７、情報提供部２２８の少なくとも一部が、ディスクリートデバイスを含む電子回路によって構成されてもよい。 In addition, the control unit 214, reception unit 216, usage restriction information provision unit 218, maintenance required mobile object information provision unit 220, maintenance required information provision unit 222, image acquisition unit 224, malfunction content determination unit 225, display control unit 226, determination At least a portion of the section 227 and the information providing section 228 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as an ASIC or an FPGA. Also, the control unit 214, reception unit 216, usage restriction information provision unit 218, maintenance required mobile object information provision unit 220, maintenance required information provision unit 222, image acquisition unit 224, defect content determination unit 225, display control unit 226, determination At least a portion of the section 227 and the information providing section 228 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
　記憶部２０４には、不図示の揮発性メモリと、不図示の不揮発性メモリとが備えられ得る。揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＡＭ等が挙げられ得る。不揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＯＭ、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられ得る。データ等が、例えば揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。プログラム、テーブル、マップ等が、例えば不揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。記憶部２０４の少なくとも一部が、上述したようなプロセッサ、集積回路等に備えられていてもよい。 The storage unit 204 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 204 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
　測位部２０５には、ＧＮＳＳセンサが備えられ得る。当該ＧＮＳＳセンサは、携帯端末２００の現在の位置を示す位置情報を、衛星測位システムを利用して取得し得る。測位部２０５によって取得された位置情報は、制御部２１４に供給され得る。制御部２１４は、測位部２０５から供給される位置情報を、通信部２１２を介して管理装置４００等に供給し得る。 The positioning unit 205 may be equipped with a GNSS sensor. The GNSS sensor can obtain position information indicating the current position of the mobile terminal 200 using a satellite positioning system. The position information acquired by the positioning unit 205 may be supplied to the control unit 214. The control unit 214 can supply the position information supplied from the positioning unit 205 to the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 212.
　撮像部２０６、即ち、カメラは、撮像を行い得る。 The imaging unit 206, ie, the camera, can perform imaging.
　操作部２０８は、携帯端末２００のユーザが当該携帯端末２００を操作する際に用いられ得る。表示部２１０には、不図示の表示素子が備えられている。表示素子としては、例えば、液晶表示素子、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示素子等が用いられ得る。このような表示素子が備えられた不図示のタッチパネルによって、操作部２０８と表示部２１０とが構成されてもよい。 The operation unit 208 can be used by a user of the mobile terminal 200 to operate the mobile terminal 200. The display section 210 is equipped with a display element (not shown). As the display element, for example, a liquid crystal display element, an organic electroluminescence display element, etc. can be used. The operation unit 208 and the display unit 210 may be configured by a touch panel (not shown) including such a display element.
　通信部２１２は、無線通信等を行い得る。通信部２１２は、基地局２３とネットワーク２４とを介して無線通信を行い得る。携帯端末２００は、当該携帯端末２００に備えられた通信部２１２と、ネットワーク２４とを介して、管理装置４００等にアクセスし得る。また、通信部２１２は、例えば、無線ＬＡＮを用いた通信をも行い得る。より具体的には、通信部２１２は、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）規格等に基づく無線通信をも行い得る。通信部２１２には、不図示の近距離無線通信モジュールが備えられ得る。近距離無線通信モジュールとしては、例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）規格に対応した通信モジュールが用いられ得るが、これに限定されない。 The communication unit 212 can perform wireless communication and the like. The communication unit 212 can perform wireless communication via the base station 23 and the network 24. The mobile terminal 200 can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 212 provided in the mobile terminal 200 and the network 24. Furthermore, the communication unit 212 can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 212 can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like. The communication unit 212 may include a short-range wireless communication module (not shown). As the short-range wireless communication module, for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
　端末装置３００は、メンテナンス作業を提供するメンテナンスメンバーによって所持され得る。端末装置３００としては、例えば、携帯型の電子機器等が挙げられ得る。かかる携帯型の電子機器としては、例えばスマートフォン等が挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。端末装置３００が、タブレット端末、ウェアラブル端末等であってもよい。端末装置３００には、メンテナンスメンバーのためのアプリケーションソフトウェアがインストールされ得る。 The terminal device 300 may be owned by a maintenance member who provides maintenance work. The terminal device 300 may be, for example, a portable electronic device. Examples of such portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, smartphones. The terminal device 300 may be a tablet terminal, a wearable terminal, or the like. Application software for maintenance members may be installed on the terminal device 300.
　図２Ｃに示すように、端末装置３００には、演算部３０２と、記憶部３０４と、撮像部３０６と、操作部３０８と、表示部３１０と、測位部３１１と、通信部３１２とが備えられ得る。また、端末装置３００には、不図示のスピーカ、不図示のマイク等が更に備えられ得る。なお、端末装置３００には、これらの構成要素以外の構成要素も備えられ得るが、ここでは説明を省略する。端末装置３００には、後述するように、本実施形態による管理方法等をコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムが予めインストールされ得る。 As shown in FIG. 2C, the terminal device 300 includes a calculation section 302, a storage section 304, an imaging section 306, an operation section 308, a display section 310, a positioning section 311, and a communication section 312. obtain. Furthermore, the terminal device 300 may further include a speaker (not shown), a microphone (not shown), and the like. Note that the terminal device 300 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here. As will be described later, a program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance in the terminal device 300.
　演算部３０２は、例えば、ＣＰＵ、ＧＰＵ等のプロセッサによって構成され得る。即ち、演算部３０２は、処理回路によって構成され得る。 The calculation unit 302 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU or GPU, for example. That is, the calculation unit 302 may be configured by a processing circuit.
　演算部３０２には、制御部３１４と、受付部３１５と、報酬情報入力受付部３１６と、入力受付部３１７と、完了情報受付部３１８と、受託情報供給部３２０と、画像取得部３２２と、音声情報提供部３２４と、提供部３２６と、メンテナンス記録提供部３２８と、位置情報取得部３２９と、表示制御部３３０と、可否判定部３３１とが備えられ得る。制御部３１４は、端末装置３００の全体の制御を司る。表示制御部３３０は、表示部３１０の画面表示の制御を司る。制御部３１４と、受付部３１５と、報酬情報入力受付部３１６と、入力受付部３１７と、完了情報受付部３１８と、受託情報供給部３２０と、画像取得部３２２と、音声情報提供部３２４と、提供部３２６と、メンテナンス記録提供部３２８と、位置情報取得部３２９と、表示制御部３３０と、可否判定部３３１とは、記憶部３０４に記憶されているプログラムが演算部３０２によって実行されることによって実現され得る。 The calculation unit 302 includes a control unit 314, a reception unit 315, a remuneration information input reception unit 316, an input reception unit 317, a completion information reception unit 318, a commissioned information supply unit 320, an image acquisition unit 322, An audio information providing section 324, a providing section 326, a maintenance record providing section 328, a position information obtaining section 329, a display control section 330, and an availability determining section 331 may be provided. The control unit 314 is in charge of overall control of the terminal device 300. The display control unit 330 controls the screen display of the display unit 310. A control section 314, a reception section 315, a remuneration information input reception section 316, an input reception section 317, a completion information reception section 318, an entrustment information supply section 320, an image acquisition section 322, and an audio information provision section 324. , the providing unit 326 , the maintenance record providing unit 328 , the position information acquiring unit 329 , the display control unit 330 , and the availability determining unit 331 are configured such that the program stored in the storage unit 304 is executed by the calculation unit 302 This can be achieved by
　なお、制御部３１４、受付部３１５、報酬情報入力受付部３１６、入力受付部３１７、完了情報受付部３１８、受託情報供給部３２０、画像取得部３２２、音声情報提供部３２４、提供部３２６、メンテナンス記録提供部３２８、位置情報取得部３２９、表示制御部３３０、可否判定部３３１の少なくとも一部が、ＡＳＩＣ、ＦＰＧＡ等の集積回路によって実現されてもよい。また、制御部３１４、受付部３１５、報酬情報入力受付部３１６、入力受付部３１７、完了情報受付部３１８、受託情報供給部３２０、画像取得部３２２、音声情報提供部３２４、提供部３２６、メンテナンス記録提供部３２８、位置情報取得部３２９、表示制御部３３０、可否判定部３３１の少なくとも一部が、ディスクリートデバイスを含む電子回路によって構成されてもよい。 In addition, the control section 314, reception section 315, remuneration information input reception section 316, input reception section 317, completion information reception section 318, commissioned information supply section 320, image acquisition section 322, audio information provision section 324, provision section 326, maintenance At least a portion of the record providing section 328, the position information acquisition section 329, the display control section 330, and the availability determination section 331 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as ASIC or FPGA. In addition, the control unit 314, the reception unit 315, the remuneration information input reception unit 316, the input reception unit 317, the completion information reception unit 318, the commissioned information supply unit 320, the image acquisition unit 322, the audio information provision unit 324, the provision unit 326, and the maintenance At least a portion of the record providing section 328, the position information acquisition section 329, the display control section 330, and the availability determination section 331 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
　記憶部３０４には、不図示の揮発性メモリと、不図示の不揮発性メモリとが備えられ得る。揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＡＭ等が挙げられ得る。不揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＯＭ、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられ得る。データ等が、例えば揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。プログラム、テーブル、マップ等が、例えば不揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。記憶部３０４の少なくとも一部が、上述したようなプロセッサ、集積回路等に備えられていてもよい。 The storage unit 304 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 304 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
　撮像部３０６、即ち、カメラは、撮像を行い得る。 The imaging unit 306, ie, the camera, can perform imaging.
　操作部３０８は、端末装置３００のユーザが当該端末装置３００を操作する際に用いられ得る。表示部３１０には、不図示の表示素子が備えられている。表示素子としては、例えば、液晶表示素子、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示素子等が用いられ得る。このような表示素子が備えられた不図示のタッチパネルによって、操作部３０８と表示部３１０とが構成されてもよい。 The operation unit 308 can be used by a user of the terminal device 300 to operate the terminal device 300. The display section 310 is equipped with a display element (not shown). As the display element, for example, a liquid crystal display element, an organic electroluminescence display element, etc. can be used. The operation unit 308 and the display unit 310 may be configured by a touch panel (not shown) including such a display element.
　測位部３１１には、ＧＮＳＳセンサが備えられ得る。当該ＧＮＳＳセンサは、端末装置３００の現在の位置を示す位置情報を、衛星測位システムを利用して取得する。測位部３１１によって取得された位置情報は、後述する位置情報取得部３２９に供給される。位置情報取得部３２９は、測位部３１１から供給される位置情報を取得し得る。位置情報取得部３２９は、測位部３１１から供給される位置情報を、通信部３１２を介して管理装置４００等に供給し得る。管理装置４００は、端末装置３００の現在の位置を示す位置情報を、後述するメンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２に記憶し得る。 The positioning unit 311 may be equipped with a GNSS sensor. The GNSS sensor acquires position information indicating the current position of the terminal device 300 using a satellite positioning system. The position information acquired by the positioning unit 311 is supplied to a position information acquisition unit 329, which will be described later. The position information acquisition unit 329 can acquire position information supplied from the positioning unit 311. The position information acquisition unit 329 can supply the position information supplied from the positioning unit 311 to the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 312. The management device 400 can store location information indicating the current location of the terminal device 300 in a maintenance member information storage unit 432, which will be described later.
　通信部３１２は、無線通信等を行い得る。通信部３１２は、基地局２３とネットワーク２４とを介して無線通信を行い得る。端末装置３００は、当該端末装置３００に備えられた通信部３１２と、ネットワーク２４とを介して、管理装置４００等にアクセスし得る。また、通信部３１２は、例えば、無線ＬＡＮを用いた通信をも行い得る。より具体的には、通信部３１２は、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）規格等に基づく無線通信をも行い得る。通信部３１２には、不図示の近距離無線通信モジュールが備えられ得る。近距離無線通信モジュールとしては、例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）規格に対応した通信モジュールが用いられ得るが、これに限定されない。 The communication unit 312 can perform wireless communication and the like. The communication unit 312 can perform wireless communication via the base station 23 and the network 24. The terminal device 300 can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 312 provided in the terminal device 300 and the network 24. Furthermore, the communication unit 312 can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 312 can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like. The communication unit 312 may include a short-range wireless communication module (not shown). As the short-range wireless communication module, for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
　管理装置（管理サーバ）４００は、管理システム１０を運営する運営事業者の管理センタ２９等に設置され得るが、これに限定されない。図２Ｄに示すように、管理装置４００には、演算部４０２と、記憶部４０４と、通信部４０６とが備えられ得る。なお、管理装置４００には、これらの構成要素以外の構成要素も備えられ得るが、ここでは説明を省略する。管理装置４００の少なくとも一部が管理センタ２９外に備えられた他のサーバ等によって構成されていてもよい。記憶部４０４には、本実施形態による管理方法等をコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムが予めインストールされ得る。 The management device (management server) 400 may be installed in the management center 29 of the operator that operates the management system 10, but is not limited thereto. As shown in FIG. 2D, the management device 400 may include a calculation section 402, a storage section 404, and a communication section 406. Note that the management device 400 may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here. At least a part of the management device 400 may be configured by another server provided outside the management center 29. A program for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment may be installed in advance in the storage unit 404.
　演算部４０２は、例えば、ＣＰＵ、ＧＰＵ等のプロセッサによって構成され得る。即ち、演算部４０２は、処理回路によって構成され得る。 The calculation unit 402 may be configured by a processor such as a CPU or GPU, for example. That is, the calculation unit 402 may be configured by a processing circuit.
　演算部４０２には、制御部４０８と、予約受付部４１０と、推定部４１２と、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４と、判定部４１６と、移動体判定部４１７と、通知部４１８と、選定部４２０と、メンバー評価部４２２と、処理部４２３と、作業状態適否判定部４２４と、位置姿勢適否判定部４２５とが備えられ得る。演算部４０２には、設定部４４０と、決定部４４２と、是正部４４４と、インセンティブ付与部４４５と、取得部４４６と、作業評価部４４８と、作業標準生成部４５０と、報酬決定部４５１と、作業標準情報提供部４５２と、対価決定部４５４と、情報提供者評価部４５６とが更に備えられ得る。制御部４０８は、管理装置４００の全体の制御を司る。制御部４０８と、予約受付部４１０と、推定部４１２と、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４と、判定部４１６と、移動体判定部４１７と、通知部４１８と、選定部４２０と、メンバー評価部４２２と、処理部４２３と、作業状態適否判定部４２４と、位置姿勢適否判定部４２５とは、記憶部４０４に記憶されているプログラムが演算部４０２によって実行されることによって実現され得る。設定部４４０と、決定部４４２と、是正部４４４と、インセンティブ付与部４４５と、取得部４４６と、作業評価部４４８と、作業標準生成部４５０と、報酬決定部４５１と、作業標準情報提供部４５２と、対価決定部４５４と、情報提供者評価部４５６とは、記憶部４０４に記憶されているプログラムが演算部４０２によって実行されることによって実現され得る。 The calculation unit 402 includes a control unit 408 , a reservation reception unit 410 , an estimation unit 412 , a maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 , a determination unit 416 , a moving object determination unit 417 , a notification unit 418 , and a selection unit 420 , a member evaluation section 422 , a processing section 423 , a working state suitability determination section 424 , and a position/posture suitability determination section 425 . The calculation unit 402 includes a setting unit 440, a determination unit 442, a correction unit 444, an incentive provision unit 445, an acquisition unit 446, a work evaluation unit 448, a work standard generation unit 450, and a remuneration determination unit 451. , a work standard information providing section 452, a consideration determining section 454, and an information provider evaluation section 456 may further be provided. The control unit 408 is in charge of overall control of the management device 400. Control unit 408, Reservation reception unit 410, Estimation unit 412, Maintenance required information distribution unit 414, Determination unit 416, Mobile body determination unit 417, Notification unit 418, Selection unit 420, Member evaluation unit 422 , the processing unit 423 , the working state suitability determination unit 424 , and the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 can be realized by the calculation unit 402 executing a program stored in the storage unit 404 . Setting unit 440, determining unit 442, correction unit 444, incentive providing unit 445, acquiring unit 446, work evaluation unit 448, work standard generation unit 450, remuneration determination unit 451, and work standard information provision unit 452 , consideration determination section 454 , and information provider evaluation section 456 can be realized by execution of a program stored in storage section 404 by calculation section 402 .
　なお、制御部４０８、予約受付部４１０、推定部４１２、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４、判定部４１６、移動体判定部４１７、通知部４１８、選定部４２０、メンバー評価部４２２、処理部４２３、作業状態適否判定部４２４、位置姿勢適否判定部４２５の少なくとも一部が、ＡＳＩＣ、ＦＰＧＡ等の集積回路によって実現されてもよい。また、設定部４４０、決定部４４２、是正部４４４、インセンティブ付与部４４５、取得部４４６、作業評価部４４８、作業標準生成部４５０、報酬決定部４５１、作業標準情報提供部４５２、対価決定部４５４、情報提供者評価部４５６の少なくとも一部が、ＡＳＩＣ、ＦＰＧＡ等の集積回路によって実現されてもよい。また、制御部４０８、予約受付部４１０、推定部４１２、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４、判定部４１６、移動体判定部４１７、通知部４１８、選定部４２０、メンバー評価部４２２、処理部４２３、作業状態適否判定部４２４、位置姿勢適否判定部４２５の少なくとも一部が、ディスクリートデバイスを含む電子回路によって構成されてもよい。設定部４４０、決定部４４２、是正部４４４、インセンティブ付与部４４５、取得部４４６、作業評価部４４８、作業標準生成部４５０、報酬決定部４５１、作業標準情報提供部４５２、対価決定部４５４、情報提供者評価部４５６の少なくとも一部が、ディスクリートデバイスを含む電子回路によって構成されてもよい。 In addition, the control section 408, the reservation reception section 410, the estimation section 412, the maintenance required information distribution section 414, the judgment section 416, the mobile object judgment section 417, the notification section 418, the selection section 420, the member evaluation section 422, the processing section 423, and the work At least a portion of the state suitability determination section 424 and the position/orientation suitability determination section 425 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as an ASIC or an FPGA. Also, a setting unit 440, a determining unit 442, a correction unit 444, an incentive providing unit 445, an acquiring unit 446, a work evaluation unit 448, a work standard generation unit 450, a remuneration determination unit 451, a work standard information provision unit 452, a consideration determination unit 454 , at least a part of the information provider evaluation unit 456 may be realized by an integrated circuit such as an ASIC or an FPGA. Also, the control section 408, reservation reception section 410, estimation section 412, maintenance required information distribution section 414, determination section 416, mobile object determination section 417, notification section 418, selection section 420, member evaluation section 422, processing section 423, work At least a portion of the state suitability determination unit 424 and the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device. Setting unit 440, determining unit 442, correction unit 444, incentive providing unit 445, acquiring unit 446, work evaluation unit 448, work standard generation unit 450, remuneration determination unit 451, work standard information provision unit 452, consideration determination unit 454, information At least a portion of the provider evaluation unit 456 may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
　記憶部４０４には、不図示の揮発性メモリと、不図示の不揮発性メモリとが備えられ得る。揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＡＭ等が挙げられ得る。不揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＯＭ、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられ得る。データ等が、例えば揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。プログラム、テーブル、マップ等が、例えば不揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。記憶部４０４の少なくとも一部が、上述したようなプロセッサ、集積回路等に備えられていてもよい。また、記憶部４０４には、ＨＤＤ（Ｈａｒｄ　Ｄｉｓｋ　Ｄｒｉｖｅ）、ＳＳＤ（Ｓｏｌｉｄ　Ｓｔａｔｅ　Ｄｒｉｖｅ）等が更に備えられ得る。 The storage unit 404 may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 404 may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above. Furthermore, the storage unit 404 may further include an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), an SSD (Solid State Drive), and the like.
　記憶部４０４には、ユーザ情報記憶部４２６と、移動体情報記憶部４２８と、予約情報記憶部４３０と、メンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２と、作業情報記憶部４３３と、メンテナンス履歴記憶部４３４と、利用履歴記憶部４３６と、地図情報記憶部４３８とが備えられ得る。 The storage unit 404 includes a user information storage unit 426, a moving object information storage unit 428, a reservation information storage unit 430, a maintenance member information storage unit 432, a work information storage unit 433, a maintenance history storage unit 434, A usage history storage section 436 and a map information storage section 438 may be provided.
　ユーザ情報記憶部４２６には、ユーザに関する情報であるユーザ情報が記憶され得る。ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザの氏名に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザの連絡先に関する情報が含まれ得る。連絡先としては、住所、電話番号、電子メールアドレス等が含まれ得る。上述したように、ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザに対して付与された識別情報であるユーザ識別情報が含まれ得る。また、上述したように、ユーザ情報記憶部４２６に記憶されるユーザ識別情報は、登録識別情報とも称され得る。また、ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザが行い得るメンテナンス作業に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザの格付けに関する情報が含まれ得る。また、ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザによる移動体１００の利用履歴に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、ユーザ情報には、当該ユーザの特性に関する情報が含まれ得る。ユーザの特性に関する情報としては、当該ユーザの運転特性に関する情報が含まれ得る。運転特性としては、乱暴な運転等が含まれ得る。なお、ユーザ情報は、これらに限定されない。 The user information storage unit 426 may store user information that is information related to users. The user information may include information regarding the user's name. Further, the user information may include information regarding the user's contact information. Contact information may include address, phone number, email address, etc. As described above, the user information may include user identification information that is identification information given to the user. Furthermore, as described above, the user identification information stored in the user information storage section 426 may also be referred to as registered identification information. Further, the user information may include information regarding maintenance work that the user can perform. Further, the user information may include information regarding the user's rating. Further, the user information may include information regarding the usage history of the mobile object 100 by the user. Further, the user information may include information regarding the characteristics of the user. The information regarding the user's characteristics may include information regarding the user's driving characteristics. Driving characteristics may include aggressive driving and the like. Note that the user information is not limited to these.
　移動体情報記憶部４２８には、各々の移動体１００に関する情報である移動体情報が記憶され得る。移動体情報には、当該移動体１００の車種等を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００の購入年月日等を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に装着されている部品等を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に備えられたオプション等を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００の識別情報である移動体識別情報が含まれ得る。移動体識別情報としては、例えば、当該移動体１００の管理番号等が挙げられ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００の位置を示す情報が含まれ得る。 The mobile body information storage unit 428 may store mobile body information that is information regarding each mobile body 100. The moving object information may include information indicating the vehicle type of the moving object 100 and the like. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include information indicating the date of purchase of the mobile object 100 and the like. Further, the moving object information may include information indicating parts and the like attached to the moving object 100. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include information indicating options and the like provided to the mobile object 100. Further, the mobile body information may include mobile body identification information that is identification information of the mobile body 100. The mobile body identification information may include, for example, the management number of the mobile body 100. Further, the mobile object information may include information indicating the position of the mobile object 100.
　移動体情報には、メンテナンス作業が必要な移動体１００である要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａ（図３参照）に当該移動体１００が該当するか否かを示す情報が含まれ得る。例えば、当該移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当することを示す要メンテナンス移動体情報が携帯端末２００等から管理装置４００に供給された場合には、その旨を示す情報が移動体情報記憶部４２８に記憶され得る。また、当該移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当することが管理装置４００に備えられた推定部４１２によって推定された場合には、その旨を示す情報が移動体情報記憶部４２８に記憶され得る。 The mobile object information may include information indicating whether the mobile object 100 corresponds to the maintenance required mobile object 100A (see FIG. 3), which is a mobile object 100 that requires maintenance work. For example, when maintenance-required moving object information indicating that the mobile object 100 corresponds to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is supplied from the mobile terminal 200 or the like to the management device 400, the information indicating this is stored in the moving object information memory. 428. Further, when the estimation unit 412 included in the management device 400 estimates that the mobile object 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile object 100A, information indicating this is stored in the mobile object information storage unit 428. obtain.
　移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報（不具合情報）が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該不具合内容情報が得られた日時を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に生じた不具合の履歴を示す情報が含まれ得る。 The mobile object information may include problem content information (defect information) indicating the details of the problem occurring in the mobile object 100. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include information indicating the date and time when the defect content information was obtained. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include information indicating a history of problems that have occurred in the mobile object 100.
　移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に備えられたバッテリ１０８の残容量（バッテリ残量）等が含まれ得る。 The mobile object information may include the remaining capacity (remaining battery amount) of the battery 108 provided in the mobile object 100.
　移動体情報には、当該移動体１００が配されている貸し出しポート２２に関する情報である貸し出しポート情報が含まれ得る。貸し出しポート情報には、当該貸し出しポート２２の名称、管理番号（識別番号）等が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００をロックしているポートロック機構３８の管理番号等が含まれ得る。また、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に装着されている部品等を示す情報が含まれ得る。なお、移動体情報は、これらに限定されない。 The mobile object information may include rental port information that is information regarding the rental port 22 in which the mobile object 100 is placed. The rental port information may include the name, management number (identification number), etc. of the rental port 22. Furthermore, the mobile object information may include the management number of the port lock mechanism 38 that locks the mobile object 100, and the like. Further, the moving object information may include information indicating parts and the like attached to the moving object 100. Note that the mobile information is not limited to these.
　予約情報記憶部４３０には、各々の移動体１００に対しての利用予約に関する情報である利用予約情報が記憶され得る。利用予約情報には、当該移動体１００が予約済みであることを示す予約済情報が含まれ得る。また、利用予約情報には、当該移動体１００が予約済みでないことを示す情報が含まれ得る。即ち、利用予約情報には、当該移動体１００が利用可能な移動体である利用可能移動体１００Ｂ（図３参照）であることを示す利用可能情報が含まれ得る。また、予約情報記憶部４３０には、各々の移動体１００の利用予約を制限するための情報である利用予約制限情報が記憶され得る。利用予約制限情報には、当該移動体１００の利用予約の中止を示す情報である利用予約中止情報が含まれ得る。また、利用予約制限情報には、当該移動体１００の利用予約の頻度を制限するための情報である利用予約頻度制限情報が含まれ得る。また、利用予約を制限するための情報としては、当該移動体１００の利用予約の優先度に関する利用予約優先度情報が含まれ得る。なお、利用予約情報は、これらに限定されない。 The reservation information storage unit 430 may store usage reservation information that is information regarding usage reservations for each mobile object 100. The usage reservation information may include reservation information indicating that the mobile object 100 has been reserved. Further, the usage reservation information may include information indicating that the mobile object 100 is not reserved. That is, the usage reservation information may include availability information indicating that the mobile object 100 is an available mobile object 100B (see FIG. 3). Further, the reservation information storage unit 430 may store usage reservation restriction information, which is information for restricting usage reservations for each mobile object 100. The usage reservation restriction information may include usage reservation cancellation information that is information indicating cancellation of the usage reservation of the mobile object 100. Further, the usage reservation restriction information may include usage reservation frequency restriction information, which is information for restricting the frequency of usage reservations for the mobile object 100. Further, the information for restricting usage reservations may include usage reservation priority information regarding the priority of usage reservations for the mobile object 100. Note that the usage reservation information is not limited to these.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２には、メンテナンスメンバーに関する情報であるメンテナンスメンバー情報が登録され得る。メンテナンスメンバーは、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する。例えば、移動体１００の販売業者（自転車販売業者）等がメンテナンスメンバーとして登録され得るが、これに限定されない。移動体１００のメンテナンスを行い得る様々な者が、メンテナンスメンバーとして登録され得る。メンテナンスメンバーは、自然人であってもよいし、法人であってもよい。メンテナンスメンバーは、事業者であってもよいし、非事業者であってもよい。メンテナンスメンバーは、複数種のメンテナンス作業のうちの少なくとも１つに対応可能であればよい。例えば、点検のみが可能な者であっても、メンテナンスメンバーとして登録され得る。 Maintenance member information, which is information related to maintenance members, can be registered in the maintenance member information storage unit 432. The maintenance member provides maintenance work to the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. For example, a vendor (bicycle vendor) of the mobile object 100 may be registered as a maintenance member, but is not limited thereto. Various people who can perform maintenance on the mobile object 100 can be registered as maintenance members. The maintenance member may be a natural person or a corporation. The maintenance members may be business operators or non-business operators. The maintenance members only need to be capable of handling at least one of multiple types of maintenance work. For example, even a person who can only perform inspections can be registered as a maintenance member.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、メンテナンスメンバーの氏名に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーの連絡先に関する情報が含まれ得る。連絡先としては、住所、電話番号、電子メールアドレス等が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーの所在地に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーの店舗が固定店舗であるか移動店舗であるかを示す情報が含まれ得る。 The maintenance member information may include information regarding the name of the maintenance member. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information regarding the contact information of the maintenance member. Contact information may include address, phone number, email address, etc. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information regarding the location of the maintenance member. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information indicating whether the maintenance member's store is a fixed store or a mobile store.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーに対して付与された識別情報であるメンテナンスメンバー識別情報が含まれ得る。メンテナンスメンバー識別情報は、登録メンバー識別情報とも称され得る。 The maintenance member information may include maintenance member identification information that is identification information given to the maintenance member. Maintenance member identification information may also be referred to as registered member identification information.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって所持される端末装置３００の現在の位置を示す位置情報が含まれ得る。 The maintenance member information may include location information indicating the current location of the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業に関する情報である対応可能作業情報が含まれ得る。 The maintenance member information may include available work information, which is information regarding maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーのスキルに関する情報が含まれ得る。メンテナンスメンバーのスキルに関する情報は、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって申告され得るが、これに限定されない。例えば、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって提供されたメンテナンス作業の結果に基づいて当該メンテナンスメンバーのスキルが判定されてもよい。例えば、一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの期間に基づいて、当該メンテナンスメンバーのスキルが判定されてもよい。また、例えば、一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの当該一の移動体１００の走行距離に基づいて、当該メンテナンスメンバーのスキルが判定されてもよい。 The maintenance member information may include information regarding the skills of the maintenance member. Information regarding the skills of a maintenance member may be declared by the maintenance member, but is not limited thereto. For example, the skill of the maintenance member may be determined based on the results of maintenance work provided by the maintenance member. For example, the skills of the maintenance member may be determined based on the period until the same maintenance work that was performed on the one mobile object 100 is required again. Good too. Further, for example, based on the distance traveled by the one moving body 100 until the same one maintenance work as the one maintenance work performed on the one moving body 100 is required again, , the skills of the maintenance member may be determined.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーがメンテナンス作業を行った場合の報酬（工賃）に関する情報である報酬情報が含まれ得る。かかる報酬情報は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが提供し得る複数種のメンテナンス作業の各々に対して設定され得るが、これに限定されない。 The maintenance member information may include remuneration information that is information regarding remuneration (wage) when the maintenance member performs maintenance work. Such remuneration information may be set for each of a plurality of types of maintenance work that the maintenance member may provide, but is not limited thereto.
　なお、メンテナンス作業に対する報酬は、当該メンテナンス作業に要した時間と、当該メンテナンスメンバーの単位時間当たりの工賃とを乗算することによって算出されてもよい。当該メンテナンスメンバーの単位時間当たりの工賃を示す情報が、報酬情報に含まれてもよい。メンテナンスメンバーの単位時間当たりの工賃は、当該メンテナンスメンバーのスキルに基づいて設定されてもよい。 Note that the remuneration for maintenance work may be calculated by multiplying the time required for the maintenance work by the wage per unit time of the maintenance member. Information indicating the maintenance member's wage per unit time may be included in the remuneration information. The wage per unit time of the maintenance member may be set based on the skill of the maintenance member.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、メンバー評価情報が含まれ得る。メンバー評価情報は、メンテナンスメンバーに対する評価を示す情報である。メンバー評価情報は、後述するように、メンテナンスメンバーによって行われたメンテナンス作業に対する評価を示す情報である後述する作業評価情報に基づいて、メンバー評価部４２２によって生成され得る。 The maintenance member information may include member evaluation information. Member evaluation information is information indicating evaluations of maintenance members. The member evaluation information may be generated by the member evaluation unit 422 based on work evaluation information, which will be described later, which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work performed by the maintenance member.
　メンテナンスメンバー情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーの稼働時間に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンスメンバー情報には、各種のメンテナンス作業に対しての当該メンテナンスメンバーの報酬に関する情報が含まれ得る。なお、メンテナンスメンバー情報は、これらに限定されない。 The maintenance member information may include information regarding the operating hours of the maintenance member. Furthermore, the maintenance member information may include information regarding remuneration of the maintenance member for various maintenance tasks. Note that maintenance member information is not limited to these.
　作業情報記憶部４３３には、メンテナンス作業を行う際におけるメンテナンスメンバーの適切な位置姿勢を示す情報が、当該メンテナンス作業の内容に応じて記憶されている。また、作業情報記憶部４３３には、メンテナンス作業を行う際における要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの適切な位置姿勢を示す情報が、当該メンテナンス作業の内容に応じて記憶されている。また、作業情報記憶部４３３には、メンテナンス作業を行う際における部品の適切な位置姿勢を示す情報が、当該メンテナンス作業の内容に応じて記憶されている。より具体的には、作業情報記憶部４３３には、メンテナンス作業を行う際における部品の適切な位置姿勢を示す情報が、当該メンテナンス作業に用いられる部品に応じて記憶されている。このように、作業情報記憶部４３３には、適切な位置姿勢を示す情報である適切位置姿勢情報が記憶されている。 The work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating appropriate positions and postures of maintenance members when performing maintenance work, depending on the content of the maintenance work. Further, the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating an appropriate position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A when performing maintenance work, depending on the content of the maintenance work. Further, the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating appropriate positions and orientations of parts when performing maintenance work, depending on the content of the maintenance work. More specifically, the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating appropriate positions and orientations of parts when performing maintenance work, depending on the parts used in the maintenance work. In this way, the work information storage unit 433 stores appropriate position/posture information that is information indicating a suitable position/posture.
　作業情報記憶部４３３には、メンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す情報が記憶されている。即ち、貸し出しポート２２の近傍には、メンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具を保管する保管場所が備えられている。作業情報記憶部４３３には、当該保管場所を示す情報が記憶されている。 The work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating storage locations of tools used during maintenance work. That is, a storage area is provided near the rental port 22 to store tools used during maintenance work. The work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating the storage location.
　メンテナンス履歴記憶部（メンテナンス履歴情報記憶部、メンテナンス履歴データベース）４３４には、各々の移動体１００に対するメンテナンス履歴（メンテナンス履歴情報）が記憶され得る。メンテナンス履歴としては、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してメンテナンス作業を行った者に関する情報が含まれ得る。メンテナンス作業は、メンテナンスメンバーによって行われ得る。メンテナンスメンバーは、メンテナンスが必要な移動体である要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａ（図３参照）に対するメンテナンス作業を行う者として予め登録され得る。なお、メンテナンス作業は、メンテナンスメンバー以外の者によって行われてもよい。メンテナンス履歴としては、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対して行われたメンテナンス作業の日時を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス履歴としては、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対して行われたメンテナンス作業の内容を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス履歴としては、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業において当該移動体１００に装着した部品（使用部品）に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス履歴としては、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業に要した時間に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス履歴としては、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対して行われたメンテナンス作業の報酬に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス履歴としては、当該メンテナンスに関する申し送り事項等も含まれ得る。なお、メンテナンス履歴は、これらに限定されない。 The maintenance history storage unit (maintenance history information storage unit, maintenance history database) 434 can store maintenance history (maintenance history information) for each mobile object 100. The maintenance history may include information regarding the person who performed maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Maintenance work may be performed by maintenance members. The maintenance member can be registered in advance as a person who performs maintenance work on the maintenance required mobile body 100A (see FIG. 3), which is a mobile body that requires maintenance. Note that the maintenance work may be performed by someone other than the maintenance members. The maintenance history may include information indicating the date and time of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may include information indicating the content of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may include information regarding parts (used parts) mounted on the moving body 100 during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may include information regarding the time required for maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may include information regarding remuneration for maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance history may also include matters related to the maintenance. Note that the maintenance history is not limited to these.
　利用履歴記憶部（利用履歴情報記憶部、利用履歴データベース）４３６には、各々の移動体１００の利用履歴（利用履歴情報）が記憶され得る。利用履歴には、当該移動体１００を利用した者である利用者に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、利用履歴には、当該移動体１００を利用した時間である利用時間に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、利用履歴には、当該移動体１００が走行した距離である走行距離（利用距離）に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、利用履歴には、当該移動体１００の走行データが含まれ得る。走行データには、当該移動体１００が走行した経路（利用経路）に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、走行データには、当該移動体１００の走行速度に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、走行データには、当該移動体１００を走行させた際における電力負荷を示す情報が含まれ得る。かかる電力負荷は、移動体１００に備えられた不図示のセンサ等によって取得される情報に基づいて算出され得る。このように、利用履歴には、走行履歴が含まれ得る。なお、利用履歴と走行履歴とを別個に記憶部４０４に記憶してもよい。また、利用履歴には、当該移動体１００のメンテナンスに関するユーザからの要望を示す情報が含まれ得る。なお、利用履歴は、これらに限定されない。 The usage history storage unit (usage history information storage unit, usage history database) 436 can store the usage history (usage history information) of each mobile object 100. The usage history may include information regarding the user who used the mobile object 100. Further, the usage history may include information regarding the usage time, which is the time the mobile object 100 was used. Further, the usage history may include information regarding the travel distance (usage distance), which is the distance traveled by the mobile object 100. Further, the usage history may include travel data of the mobile object 100. The travel data may include information regarding the route traveled by the mobile object 100 (route used). Further, the traveling data may include information regarding the traveling speed of the mobile object 100. Further, the traveling data may include information indicating the power load when the mobile object 100 is traveling. This power load can be calculated based on information acquired by a sensor (not shown) provided in the mobile body 100. In this way, the usage history may include the driving history. Note that the usage history and the driving history may be stored separately in the storage unit 404. Further, the usage history may include information indicating a user's request regarding maintenance of the mobile object 100. Note that the usage history is not limited to these.
　地図情報記憶部４３８には、地図情報が記憶され得る。 Map information can be stored in the map information storage section 438.
　通信部４０６には、例えば、不図示の通信モジュールが備えられている。通信部４０６は、ネットワーク２４を介してデータの送受信を行い得る。 The communication unit 406 includes, for example, a communication module (not shown). The communication unit 406 can transmit and receive data via the network 24.
　管理装置４００は、シェアリングシステム１２のホストマシンとして機能し得る。管理装置４００は、登録された複数のユーザの管理を行い得る。また、管理装置４００は、複数の移動体１００の管理を行い得る。例えば、管理装置４００は、複数の移動体１００のメンテナンスの管理を行い得る。なお、管理装置４００は、複数のコンピュータが連携することによって実現されてもよい。 The management device 400 can function as a host machine for the sharing system 12. The management device 400 can manage a plurality of registered users. Furthermore, the management device 400 can manage a plurality of mobile objects 100. For example, the management device 400 can manage maintenance of a plurality of mobile objects 100. Note that the management device 400 may be realized by multiple computers working together.
　ユーザは、移動体１００を利用したい場合には、移動体１００の利用の申請を行う。即ち、ユーザは、かかる場合、移動体１００の利用予約を行う。利用予約は、当該ユーザが所持する携帯端末２００を用いて行われ得るが、これに限定されない。移動体１００の利用予約がユーザによって行われた場合、管理装置４００は、当該ユーザが受け取る予定の移動体１００に関する情報をユーザに通知する。かかる情報には、当該移動体１００が配されている貸し出しポート２２の名称、当該移動体１００をロックしているポートロック機構３８の管理番号、当該移動体１００の管理番号等が含まれ得る。管理装置４００は、ユーザが受け取る予定の移動体１００に対して、登録識別情報を供給する。管理装置４００から移動体１００への登録識別情報の供給は、ネットワーク２４を介して行われ得る。登録識別情報には、当該移動体１００を使用する予定のユーザに関する情報であるユーザ識別情報が含まれ得る。管理装置４００から移動体１００への登録識別情報の供給は、ユーザが当該移動体１００を受け取る前に完了するように速やかに行われ得る。管理装置４００から移動体１００に登録識別情報が供給されると、当該移動体１００に備えられた認証部１２６は、管理装置４００から供給された登録識別情報を記憶部１０４に格納する。こうして、移動体１００の利用予約が行われる。利用予約済みの移動体１００には、登録識別情報が供給されている。当該移動体１００が利用予約済みであるか否かは、登録識別情報が記憶部１０４に格納されているか否かにより把握され得るが、これに限定されない。 If the user wishes to use the mobile object 100, he/she applies for use of the mobile object 100. That is, in such a case, the user makes a reservation for use of the mobile object 100. The usage reservation may be made using the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user, but is not limited thereto. When a user makes a reservation to use the mobile object 100, the management device 400 notifies the user of information regarding the mobile object 100 that the user is scheduled to receive. Such information may include the name of the rental port 22 in which the mobile object 100 is placed, the management number of the port lock mechanism 38 that locks the mobile object 100, the management number of the mobile object 100, and the like. The management device 400 supplies registration identification information to the mobile object 100 that the user is scheduled to receive. The registration identification information can be supplied from the management device 400 to the mobile object 100 via the network 24. The registration identification information may include user identification information that is information regarding the user who is scheduled to use the mobile object 100. The supply of the registration identification information from the management device 400 to the mobile object 100 can be promptly completed before the user receives the mobile object 100. When the registration identification information is supplied from the management device 400 to the mobile object 100, the authentication unit 126 provided in the mobile object 100 stores the registration identification information supplied from the management device 400 in the storage unit 104. In this way, the reservation for use of the mobile object 100 is made. Registration identification information is supplied to the mobile object 100 that has been reserved for use. Whether or not the mobile object 100 has been reserved for use can be determined based on whether registration identification information is stored in the storage unit 104, but is not limited thereto.
　移動体１００を借り受けたユーザは、携帯端末２００を用いて認証処理を行う。認証処理においては、当該ユーザに関する情報が携帯端末２００から移動体１００に対して供給され得る。当該ユーザに関する情報には、当該ユーザに関するユーザ識別情報が含まれ得る。認証部１２６は、携帯端末２００から供給されたユーザ識別情報と、管理装置４００から供給された登録識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する。携帯端末２００から供給されたユーザ識別情報と、管理装置４００から供給された登録識別情報とが一致することに基づいて、認証部１２６は、ユーザの認証を行い得る。即ち、認証部１２６は、当該携帯端末２００を用いて認証処理を行ったユーザを、当該移動体１００を使用する権限を有するユーザとして認証し得る。認証部１２６によってユーザの認証が経られていない段階においては、制御部１１４は、施錠状態になるようにロック機構１０６を制御する。認証部１２６によってユーザの認証が行われた場合には、制御部１１４は、解錠状態になるようにロック機構１０６を制御する。このように、携帯端末２００を用いて施解錠が行われ得る。 The user who has borrowed the mobile object 100 performs an authentication process using the mobile terminal 200. In the authentication process, information regarding the user may be supplied from the mobile terminal 200 to the mobile object 100. The information regarding the user may include user identification information regarding the user. Authentication unit 126 determines whether the user identification information supplied from mobile terminal 200 and the registered identification information supplied from management device 400 match. Based on the fact that the user identification information supplied from the mobile terminal 200 and the registered identification information supplied from the management device 400 match, the authentication unit 126 can authenticate the user. That is, the authentication unit 126 can authenticate the user who performed the authentication process using the mobile terminal 200 as a user who is authorized to use the mobile object 100. While the user has not been authenticated by the authentication unit 126, the control unit 114 controls the lock mechanism 106 to be in a locked state. When the user is authenticated by the authentication unit 126, the control unit 114 controls the lock mechanism 106 to be in the unlocked state. In this way, locking and unlocking can be performed using the mobile terminal 200.
　ユーザは、当該ユーザが借り受けた移動体１００の不具合を発見する場合がある。即ち、ユーザは、メンテナンスが必要な移動体である要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａ（図３参照）を発見する場合がある。当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用を制限することが好ましい場合には、当該ユーザは、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用を制限するための処理を、当該ユーザが所持する携帯端末２００を用いて行い得る。 A user may discover a problem with the mobile object 100 that the user has borrowed. That is, the user may discover a maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (see FIG. 3), which is a mobile object that requires maintenance. If it is preferable to restrict the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the user performs a process for restricting the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A using the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user. obtain.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、受付部２１６が備えられ得る。受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付け得る。要メンテナンス移動体情報には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの管理番号等が含まれ得る。また、要メンテナンス移動体情報には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報が含まれ得る。要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力の受け付けは、以下のようにして行われ得る。即ち、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６が、要メンテナンス移動体情報を入力するための入力画面を、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示部２１０に表示する。要メンテナンス移動体情報が、当該入力画面上においてユーザによって入力され得る。こうして入力される要メンテナンス移動体情報が、受付部２１６によって受け付けられ得る。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the reception section 216. The reception unit 216 can receive input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A. The maintenance required mobile object information may include the management number of the maintenance required mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance-requiring moving body information may include malfunction content information indicating the content of the malfunction occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A. Acceptance of input of maintenance required mobile object information may be performed as follows. That is, the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays an input screen for inputting maintenance required moving body information on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200. Maintenance required mobile object information can be input by the user on the input screen. The maintenance required mobile object information input in this manner can be accepted by the reception unit 216.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、利用制限情報提供部２１８が備えられ得る。利用制限情報提供部２１８は、要メンテナンス移動体情報が受付部２１６によって受け付けられた場合に、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用を制限するための利用制限情報の供給を行い得る。より具体的には、利用制限情報提供部２１８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用を制限するための利用制限情報を、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに供給し得る。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the usage restriction information providing unit 218. The usage restriction information providing unit 218 can supply usage restriction information for restricting the use of the maintenance required mobile body 100A when the maintenance required mobile body information is received by the reception unit 216. More specifically, the usage restriction information providing unit 218 can supply usage restriction information for restricting the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A to the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
　上述したように、移動体１００には、利用制限情報取得部１１６が備えられ得る。利用制限情報取得部１１６は、携帯端末２００から供給される利用制限情報を取得し得る。 As described above, the mobile object 100 may be equipped with the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116. The usage restriction information acquisition unit 116 can acquire usage restriction information supplied from the mobile terminal 200.
　上述したように、移動体１００には、利用制限部１１８が備えられ得る。利用制限部１１８は、利用制限情報が利用制限情報取得部１１６によって取得された場合に、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用を制限し得る。利用制限部１１８は、移動体１００に備えられたロック機構１０６を施錠状態に設定することによって、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用を制限し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用が制限された場合には、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａは以下のようになる。即ち、かかる場合、携帯端末２００から供給されたユーザ識別情報と、当該移動体１００に備えられている記憶部１０４に格納された登録識別情報とが一致したとしても、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａは当該ユーザによって利用され得ない。即ち、かかる場合には、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに備えられた認証部１２６は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用予約を行ったユーザによって認証のための処理が行われたとしても、当該ユーザを認証しない。本実施形態によれば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用が制限され得るため、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａがユーザによって利用されるのを防止し得る。 As described above, the mobile object 100 may be equipped with the usage restriction section 118. The usage restriction unit 118 can restrict usage of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A when the usage restriction information is acquired by the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116. The usage restriction unit 118 can restrict the usage of the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A by setting the locking mechanism 106 provided in the mobile body 100 to a locked state. When the use of the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is restricted, the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A becomes as follows. That is, in such a case, even if the user identification information supplied from the mobile terminal 200 matches the registered identification information stored in the storage unit 104 provided in the mobile object 100, the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A It cannot be used by the user. In other words, in such a case, the authentication unit 126 provided in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A will not authenticate the user even if the user who has made the reservation for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A performs the authentication process. not authenticate. According to the present embodiment, the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A can be restricted, so that the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A can be prevented from being used by a user.
　図４は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ２に遷移する。 In step S1, the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S2.
　ステップＳ２において、携帯端末２００に備えられた利用制限情報提供部２１８が、移動体１００に利用制限情報を供給する。移動体１００に備えられた利用制限情報取得部１１６は、携帯端末２００から供給された利用制限情報を取得する。この後、ステップＳ３に遷移する。 In step S2, the usage restriction information providing unit 218 provided in the mobile terminal 200 supplies usage restriction information to the mobile object 100. The usage restriction information acquisition unit 116 provided in the mobile object 100 acquires the usage restriction information supplied from the mobile terminal 200. After this, the process moves to step S3.
　ステップＳ３において、移動体１００に備えられた利用制限部１１８は、当該移動体１００の利用を制限する。こうして、図４に示す処理が完了する。 In step S3, the usage restriction unit 118 provided in the mobile object 100 restricts the usage of the mobile object 100. In this way, the processing shown in FIG. 4 is completed.
　ポートロック機構３８を施錠状態に設定することによって、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用が制限されてもよい。ポートロック機構３８の施錠は、管理機３０によって制御される。ポートロック機構３８を施錠状態に設定することによって要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用を制限する場合には、当該ポートロック機構３８を施錠状態に設定するための情報が例えば管理装置４００を経由して管理機３０に供給され得る。当該ポートロック機構３８を施錠状態に設定するための情報が、携帯端末２００から管理機３０に供給されてもよい。 By setting the port lock mechanism 38 to the locked state, the use of the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may be restricted. Locking of the port lock mechanism 38 is controlled by the management machine 30. When restricting the use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A by setting the port lock mechanism 38 to the locked state, the information for setting the port lock mechanism 38 to the locked state is managed via the management device 400, for example. machine 30. Information for setting the port lock mechanism 38 to the locked state may be supplied from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 30.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０が備えられ得る。要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０は、要メンテナンス移動体情報が受付部２１６によって受け付けられた場合に、要メンテナンス移動体情報を管理装置４００に提供し得る。上述したように、管理装置４００に備えられた記憶部４０４には、移動体情報記憶部４２８が備えられ得る。移動体情報記憶部４２８には、各々の移動体１００に関する情報が記憶され得る。一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当することを示す要メンテナンス移動体情報が携帯端末２００から管理装置４００に提供された場合、制御部４０８は、以下のような処理を行う。即ち、かかる場合、制御部４０８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体情報を当該一の移動体１００に関する情報として移動体情報記憶部４２８に記憶する。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the maintenance-required moving object information providing unit 220. The maintenance-required mobile object information providing section 220 can provide the maintenance-required mobile object information to the management device 400 when the maintenance-required mobile object information is received by the reception section 216. As described above, the storage unit 404 provided in the management device 400 may include the mobile information storage unit 428. Information regarding each mobile object 100 can be stored in the mobile object information storage section 428. When maintenance required moving object information indicating that one moving object 100 corresponds to the maintenance required moving object 100A is provided from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 400, the control unit 408 performs the following processing. That is, in such a case, the control unit 408 stores the maintenance-required moving body information in the moving body information storage unit 428 as information regarding the one moving body 100.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、予約受付部４１０が備えられ得る。予約受付部４１０は、移動体１００の利用予約を受け付け得る。上述したように、管理装置４００に備えられた記憶部４０４には、予約情報記憶部４３０が備えられ得る。予約情報記憶部４３０には、各々の移動体１００に対しての利用予約に関する情報が記憶され得る。また、予約情報記憶部４３０には、各々の移動体１００の利用予約を制限するための情報が記憶され得る。予約受付部４１０は、要メンテナンス移動体情報に対応する移動体１００の利用予約を要メンテナンス移動体情報に基づいて制限し得る。利用予約の制限としては、例えば、利用予約の中止等が挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。利用予約の制限は、利用予約の頻度の制限等であってもよい。このように、本実施形態によれば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用予約が的確に制限され得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the reservation reception unit 410. The reservation accepting unit 410 can accept a reservation for using the mobile object 100. As described above, the storage unit 404 provided in the management device 400 may include the reservation information storage unit 430. The reservation information storage unit 430 can store information regarding usage reservations for each mobile object 100. Further, the reservation information storage unit 430 may store information for restricting usage reservations for each mobile object 100. The reservation accepting unit 410 can limit reservations for use of the mobile body 100 corresponding to the maintenance required mobile body information based on the maintenance required mobile body information. Examples of restrictions on usage reservations include, but are not limited to, cancellation of usage reservations. The restriction on usage reservations may be a restriction on the frequency of usage reservations. In this manner, according to the present embodiment, reservations for use of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A can be accurately restricted.
　図５は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ１２に遷移する。 In step S11, the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S12.
　ステップＳ１２において、携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０が、管理装置４００に要メンテナンス移動体情報を提供する。この後、ステップＳ１３に遷移する。 In step S12, the maintenance required moving object information providing unit 220 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides maintenance required moving object information to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S13.
　ステップＳ１３において、管理装置４００に備えられた予約受付部４１０が、当該移動体１００の利用予約を制限する。こうして、図５に示す処理が完了する。 In step S13, the reservation accepting unit 410 provided in the management device 400 restricts reservations for use of the mobile object 100. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 5 is completed.
　上述したように、移動体１００には、移動体間通信部１１１が備えられている。移動体間通信部１１１は、当該移動体間通信部１１１の通信可能範囲内に位置する他の移動体１００との間で移動体間通信を行い得る。移動体間通信部１１１の通信可能範囲は、例えば、移動体間通信部１１１を中心とする例えば半径３００メートル程度の範囲であるが、これに限定されない。移動体間通信部１１１は、通信可能範囲内に位置する他の移動体１００との間でのみ通信可能である。移動体間通信部１１１は、通信可能範囲外に位置する他の移動体１００との間では通信し得ない。従って、このような移動体間通信を用いれば、移動体間通信部１１１の通信可能範囲内に位置する移動体１００との間でのみ選択的に通信が行われ得る。 As described above, the mobile body 100 is equipped with the inter-mobile body communication section 111. The inter-mobile communication unit 111 can perform inter-mobile communication with another mobile unit 100 located within the communication range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111. The communicable range of the inter-mobile communication section 111 is, for example, a radius of about 300 meters centered on the inter-mobile communication section 111, but is not limited thereto. The inter-mobile body communication unit 111 can communicate only with other mobile bodies 100 located within the communicable range. The inter-mobile body communication unit 111 cannot communicate with other mobile bodies 100 located outside the communicable range. Therefore, if such inter-mobile body communication is used, communication can be selectively performed only with the mobile bodies 100 located within the communication range of the inter-mobile body communication unit 111.
　上述したように、移動体１００には、予約移管部１２２が備えられている。予約移管部１２２は、利用制限情報が利用制限情報取得部１１６によって取得された場合、利用可能な他の移動体１００である利用可能移動体１００Ｂに利用予約を移管し得る。利用予約の移管は、例えば以下のようにして行われ得る。即ち、移動体１００に備えられた予約移管部１２２は、他の移動体１００が利用予約済みであるか否かを、当該他の移動体１００に対して問い合わせる。当該他の移動体１００が利用予約済みである場合には、更に他の移動体１００に対して問い合わせを行う。問い合わせ先の他の移動体１００が利用予約済みでない場合には、当該他の移動体１００に利用予約を移管し得る。即ち、問い合わせ先の他の移動体１００が利用可能移動体１００Ｂである場合には、当該利用可能移動体１００Ｂに利用予約を移管する。このように、本実施形態によれば、移動体間通信部１１１の通信可能範囲内に位置する利用可能移動体１００Ｂに利用予約の移管を行い得る。 As described above, the mobile object 100 is equipped with the reservation transfer unit 122. When the usage restriction information is acquired by the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116, the reservation transfer unit 122 can transfer the usage reservation to the available mobile unit 100B, which is another available mobile unit 100. Transfer of the usage reservation may be performed, for example, as follows. That is, the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the mobile body 100 inquires of the other mobile body 100 whether or not the other mobile body 100 has already made a reservation for use. If the other mobile body 100 has already been reserved for use, further inquiries are made to the other mobile body 100. If the other mobile object 100 to which the inquiry is made does not have a usage reservation, the usage reservation can be transferred to the other mobile object 100. That is, if the other mobile body 100 to which the inquiry is made is the available mobile body 100B, the usage reservation is transferred to the available mobile body 100B. In this way, according to the present embodiment, the usage reservation can be transferred to the available mobile unit 100B located within the communication range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111.
　上述したように、管理装置４００によって利用予約が受け付けられた場合には、利用予約済みの移動体１００に対して管理装置４００から登録識別情報等が供給される。これに対し、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに備えられた予約移管部１２２によって利用予約の移管が行われる場合には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに備えられた予約移管部１２２が利用可能移動体１００Ｂに登録識別情報等を供給する。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから利用可能移動体１００Ｂに登録識別情報等が供給された場合、当該利用可能移動体１００Ｂに備えられた認証部１２６は、以下のような処理を行う。即ち、かかる場合、利用可能移動体１００Ｂに備えられた認証部１２６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから供給された登録識別情報を、当該利用可能移動体１００Ｂに備えられた記憶部１０４に格納する。こうして、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから利用可能移動体１００Ｂへの利用予約の移管が移動体間通信を用いて行われ得る。 As described above, when the management device 400 accepts a usage reservation, the management device 400 supplies registration identification information and the like to the mobile object 100 for which the usage reservation has been made. On the other hand, when the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the maintenance required mobile body 100A transfers the usage reservation, the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the maintenance required mobile unit 100A registers in the available mobile unit 100B. Provide identification information, etc. When registration identification information and the like are supplied from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A to the available mobile body 100B, the authentication unit 126 provided in the available mobile body 100B performs the following processing. That is, in such a case, the authentication section 126 provided in the available mobile object 100B stores the registration identification information supplied from the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A in the storage section 104 provided in the available mobile object 100B. In this way, the usage reservation can be transferred from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A to the available mobile body 100B using inter-mobile communication.
　図６は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２１において、移動体１００に備えられた利用制限情報取得部１１６が利用制限情報を取得する。この後、ステップＳ２２に遷移する。 In step S21, the usage restriction information acquisition unit 116 provided in the mobile object 100 acquires usage restriction information. After this, the process moves to step S22.
　ステップＳ２２において、移動体１００に備えられた移動体間通信部１１１が他の移動体１００との間で通信を行う。即ち、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに備えられた移動体間通信部１１１が他の移動体１００との間で通信を行う。移動体間通信部１１１の通信可能範囲内に利用可能移動体１００Ｂが存在する場合には（ステップＳ２３においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２４に遷移する。移動体間通信部１１１の通信可能範囲内に利用可能移動体１００Ｂが存在しない場合には（ステップＳ２３においてＮＯ）、図６に示す処理が完了する。 In step S22, the inter-mobile body communication unit 111 provided in the mobile body 100 communicates with another mobile body 100. That is, the inter-mobile body communication unit 111 provided in the maintenance-required mobile body 100A communicates with other mobile bodies 100. If the available mobile body 100B exists within the communication range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111 (YES in step S23), the process moves to step S24. If there is no available mobile body 100B within the communicable range of the inter-mobile communication unit 111 (NO in step S23), the process shown in FIG. 6 is completed.
　ステップＳ２４において、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに備えられた予約移管部１２２は、利用可能移動体１００Ｂに利用予約を移管する。こうして、図６に示す処理が完了する。 In step S24, the reservation transfer unit 122 provided in the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A transfers the usage reservation to the usable mobile body 100B. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 6 is completed.
　移動体間通信部１１１を用いた移動体間通信は、以下のように用いられてもよい。即ち、一の移動体１００から他の移動体１００に対して、当該一の移動体１００に関する情報が移動体間通信により供給される。当該一の移動体１００に関する情報を移動体間通信によって受け取った他の移動体１００は、当該一の移動体１００に関する情報を、通信部１１２を用いて管理装置４００に供給する。こうして、一の移動体１００に関する情報が、他の移動体１００を介して、管理装置４００に供給され得る。一の移動体１００が通信部１１２を用いた通信を行い得ない場合等においては、このような手法を用いることが有用である。 The inter-mobile communication using the inter-mobile communication unit 111 may be used as follows. That is, information regarding the one mobile body 100 is supplied from one mobile body 100 to another mobile body 100 through inter-mobile communication. The other mobile body 100 that has received the information regarding the one mobile body 100 through inter-mobile communication supplies the information regarding the one mobile body 100 to the management device 400 using the communication unit 112 . In this way, information regarding one mobile body 100 can be supplied to the management device 400 via another mobile body 100. It is useful to use such a method in cases such as when one mobile object 100 cannot perform communication using the communication unit 112.
　要メンテナンス移動体情報の提供は、シェアリングシステム１２のユーザによって行われてもよいし、シェアリングシステム１２のユーザ以外の者によって行われてもよい。図７は、携帯通信端末の例を示すブロック図である。シェアリングシステム１２のユーザではない者によって所持される携帯通信端末の例が、図７には示されている。 The maintenance-required mobile object information may be provided by a user of the sharing system 12, or may be provided by a person other than the user of the sharing system 12. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an example of a mobile communication terminal. An example of a mobile communication terminal owned by a person who is not a user of the sharing system 12 is shown in FIG.
　携帯通信端末２００Ａは、シェアリングシステム１２を利用するユーザではない者によって所持されている端末である。携帯通信端末２００Ａとしては、例えば、携帯型の電子機器等が挙げられ得る。かかる携帯型の電子機器としては、例えばスマートフォン等が挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。携帯通信端末２００Ａが、タブレット端末、ウェアラブル端末等であってもよい。携帯通信端末２００Ａには、シェアリングシステム１２を利用するためのアプリケーションソフトウェアはインストールされていない。 The mobile communication terminal 200A is a terminal owned by a person who is not a user of the sharing system 12. The mobile communication terminal 200A may be, for example, a portable electronic device. Examples of such portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, smartphones. The mobile communication terminal 200A may be a tablet terminal, a wearable terminal, or the like. Application software for using the sharing system 12 is not installed on the mobile communication terminal 200A.
　携帯通信端末２００Ａには、演算部２０２Ａと、記憶部２０４Ａと、撮像部２０６Ａと、操作部２０８Ａと、表示部２１０Ａと、通信部２１２Ａとが備えられ得る。また、携帯通信端末２００Ａには、不図示のスピーカ、不図示のマイク等が更に備えられ得る。なお、携帯通信端末２００Ａには、これらの構成要素以外の構成要素も備えられ得るが、ここでは説明を省略する。 The mobile communication terminal 200A may include a calculation section 202A, a storage section 204A, an imaging section 206A, an operation section 208A, a display section 210A, and a communication section 212A. Furthermore, the mobile communication terminal 200A may further include a speaker (not shown), a microphone (not shown), and the like. Note that the mobile communication terminal 200A may include components other than these components, but their description will be omitted here.
　演算部２０２Ａは、例えば、ＣＰＵ、ＧＰＵ等のプロセッサによって構成され得る。即ち、演算部２０２Ａは、処理回路によって構成され得る。 The calculation unit 202A may be configured by, for example, a processor such as a CPU or a GPU. That is, the calculation unit 202A may be configured by a processing circuit.
　演算部２０２Ａには、制御部２１４Ａと、表示制御部２２６Ａとが備えられ得る。制御部２１４Ａは、携帯通信端末２００Ａの全体の制御を司る。表示制御部２２６Ａは、表示部２１０Ａの画面表示の制御を司る。制御部２１４Ａと、表示制御部２２６Ａとは、記憶部２０４Ａに記憶されているプログラムが演算部２０２Ａによって実行されることによって実現され得る。 The calculation unit 202A may include a control unit 214A and a display control unit 226A. The control unit 214A is in charge of overall control of the mobile communication terminal 200A. The display control unit 226A controls the screen display of the display unit 210A. The control unit 214A and the display control unit 226A can be realized by the program stored in the storage unit 204A being executed by the calculation unit 202A.
　なお、制御部２１４Ａ、表示制御部２２６Ａの少なくとも一部が、ＡＳＩＣ、ＦＰＧＡ等の集積回路によって実現されてもよい。また、制御部２１４Ａ、表示制御部２２６Ａの少なくとも一部が、ディスクリートデバイスを含む電子回路によって構成されてもよい。 Note that at least part of the control unit 214A and the display control unit 226A may be realized by an integrated circuit such as ASIC or FPGA. Further, at least a portion of the control unit 214A and the display control unit 226A may be configured by an electronic circuit including a discrete device.
　記憶部２０４Ａには、不図示の揮発性メモリと、不図示の不揮発性メモリとが備えられ得る。揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＡＭ等が挙げられ得る。不揮発性メモリとしては、例えばＲＯＭ、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられ得る。データ等が、例えば揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。プログラム、テーブル、マップ等が、例えば不揮発性メモリに記憶され得る。記憶部２０４Ａの少なくとも一部が、上述したようなプロセッサ、集積回路等に備えられていてもよい。 The storage unit 204A may include a volatile memory (not shown) and a nonvolatile memory (not shown). Examples of volatile memory include RAM and the like. Examples of nonvolatile memory include ROM, flash memory, and the like. Data, etc. may be stored in volatile memory, for example. Programs, tables, maps, etc. may be stored in non-volatile memory, for example. At least a portion of the storage unit 204A may be included in a processor, an integrated circuit, or the like as described above.
　撮像部２０６Ａ、即ち、カメラは、撮像を行い得る。 The imaging unit 206A, that is, the camera can perform imaging.
　操作部２０８Ａは、携帯通信端末２００Ａのユーザが当該携帯通信端末２００Ａを操作する際に用いられ得る。表示部２１０Ａには、不図示の表示素子が備えられている。表示素子としては、例えば、液晶表示素子、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示素子等が用いられ得る。このような表示素子が備えられた不図示のタッチパネルによって、操作部２０８Ａと表示部２１０Ａとが構成されてもよい。 The operation unit 208A can be used by the user of the mobile communication terminal 200A to operate the mobile communication terminal 200A. The display section 210A is equipped with a display element (not shown). As the display element, for example, a liquid crystal display element, an organic electroluminescence display element, etc. can be used. The operation unit 208A and the display unit 210A may be configured by a touch panel (not shown) equipped with such a display element.
　通信部２１２Ａは、無線通信等を行い得る。通信部２１２Ａは、基地局２３とネットワーク２４とを介して無線通信を行い得る。携帯通信端末２００Ａは、当該携帯通信端末２００Ａに備えられた通信部２１２Ａと、ネットワーク２４とを介して、管理装置４００等にアクセスし得る。また、通信部２１２Ａは、例えば、無線ＬＡＮを用いた通信をも行い得る。より具体的には、通信部２１２Ａは、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）規格等に基づく無線通信をも行い得る。通信部２１２Ａには、不図示の近距離無線通信モジュールが備えられ得る。近距離無線通信モジュールとしては、例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）規格に対応した通信モジュールが用いられ得るが、これに限定されない。 The communication unit 212A can perform wireless communication and the like. The communication unit 212A can perform wireless communication via the base station 23 and the network 24. The mobile communication terminal 200A can access the management device 400 and the like via the communication unit 212A included in the mobile communication terminal 200A and the network 24. Further, the communication unit 212A can also perform communication using a wireless LAN, for example. More specifically, the communication unit 212A can also perform wireless communication based on the Wi-Fi (registered trademark) standard or the like. The communication unit 212A may be equipped with a short-range wireless communication module (not shown). As the short-range wireless communication module, for example, a communication module compatible with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard may be used, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
　上述したように、携帯通信端末２００Ａの所持者は、シェアリングシステム１２のユーザではない。このため、携帯通信端末２００Ａには、本実施形態による管理方法等をコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムがインストールされていない。このため、携帯通信端末２００Ａと管理装置４００との間での通信を確立するための情報が、当該携帯通信端末２００Ａに提供されることが好ましい。携帯通信端末２００Ａと管理装置４００との間での通信を確立するための情報は、例えば、移動体１００に備えられた情報提示部１１０によって提供され得るが、これに限定されない。 As described above, the owner of the mobile communication terminal 200A is not a user of the sharing system 12. Therefore, the mobile communication terminal 200A does not have a program installed therein for causing a computer to execute the management method and the like according to this embodiment. Therefore, it is preferable that information for establishing communication between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400 is provided to the mobile communication terminal 200A. Information for establishing communication between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400 may be provided by, for example, the information presentation unit 110 provided in the mobile body 100, but is not limited thereto.
　上述したように、情報提示部１１０には、例えばＱＲコード（登録商標）等が備えられ得る。当該ＱＲコード（登録商標）は、当該携帯通信端末２００Ａと管理装置４００との間での通信を確立するための情報を提供し得る。例えば、管理装置４００のＵＲＬを示す情報等が当該ＱＲコード（登録商標）によって提示され得る。当該ＱＲコード（登録商標）は、携帯通信端末２００Ａに備えられた撮像部２０６Ａによって撮像され得る。携帯通信端末２００Ａに備えられた制御部２１４Ａは、撮像部２０６Ａによって取得された画像に含まれる提示情報を解析する。上述したように、管理装置４００のＵＲＬを示す情報等が当該ＱＲコード（登録商標）によって提示され得る。制御部２１４Ａは、管理装置４００のＵＲＬ等に関する情報を、このようにして取得し得る。制御部２１４Ａは、こうして得られた情報に基づいて、管理装置４００にアクセスする。こうして、携帯通信端末２００Ａと管理装置４００との間で通信が確立され得る。 As described above, the information presentation unit 110 may be equipped with, for example, a QR code (registered trademark). The QR code (registered trademark) can provide information for establishing communication between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400. For example, information indicating the URL of the management device 400, etc. may be presented by the QR code (registered trademark). The QR code (registered trademark) can be imaged by an imaging unit 206A provided in the mobile communication terminal 200A. A control unit 214A included in the mobile communication terminal 200A analyzes presentation information included in the image acquired by the imaging unit 206A. As described above, information indicating the URL of the management device 400, etc. can be presented using the QR code (registered trademark). The control unit 214A can acquire information regarding the URL and the like of the management device 400 in this manner. The control unit 214A accesses the management device 400 based on the information obtained in this way. In this way, communication can be established between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400.
　携帯通信端末２００Ａと管理装置４００との間で通信が確立されると、要メンテナンス移動体情報を入力するための入力画面が、携帯通信端末２００Ａに備えられた表示部２１０Ａに表示される。携帯通信端末２００Ａの所持者は、当該入力画面に対して入力操作を行うことによって、要メンテナンス移動体情報を入力する。こうして入力される要メンテナンス移動体情報は、携帯通信端末２００Ａから管理装置４００に提供される。このように、本実施形態によれば、シェアリングシステム１２を利用するためのアプリケーションソフトウェアが携帯通信端末２００Ａにインストールされていない場合であっても、要メンテナンス移動体情報が管理装置４００に速やかに提供され得る。 When communication is established between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400, an input screen for inputting maintenance required mobile object information is displayed on the display unit 210A provided in the mobile communication terminal 200A. The owner of the mobile communication terminal 200A inputs maintenance-required mobile object information by performing an input operation on the input screen. The maintenance required mobile object information input in this way is provided to the management device 400 from the mobile communication terminal 200A. As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the application software for using the sharing system 12 is not installed on the mobile communication terminal 200A, maintenance-required mobile object information is promptly sent to the management device 400. may be provided.
　図８は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ３１において、情報提示部１１０によって提示された提示情報を携帯通信端末２００Ａが読み取る。この後、ステップＳ３２に遷移する。 In step S31, the mobile communication terminal 200A reads the presentation information presented by the information presentation unit 110. After this, the process moves to step S32.
　ステップＳ３２において、携帯通信端末２００Ａが管理装置４００にアクセスする。この後、ステップＳ３３に遷移する。 In step S32, the mobile communication terminal 200A accesses the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S33.
　ステップＳ３３において、携帯通信端末２００Ａと管理装置４００との間で通信が確立される。この後、ステップＳ３４に遷移する。 In step S33, communication is established between the mobile communication terminal 200A and the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S34.
　ステップＳ３４において、携帯通信端末２００Ａの所持者が要メンテナンス移動体情報を入力する。この後、ステップＳ３５に遷移する。 In step S34, the owner of the mobile communication terminal 200A inputs maintenance required mobile object information. After this, the process moves to step S35.
　ステップＳ３５において、携帯通信端末２００Ａが要メンテナンス移動体情報を管理装置４００に提供する。こうして、図８に示す処理が完了する。 In step S35, the mobile communication terminal 200A provides maintenance required mobile object information to the management device 400. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 8 is completed.
　上述したように、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａは、ユーザ等によって発見され得るが、移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っているか否かが、管理装置４００によって推定され得る。上述したように、管理装置４００には、推定部４１２が備えられ得る。推定部４１２は、各々の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っているか否かを、各々の移動体１００に関するメンテナンス履歴、利用履歴等に基づいて推定し得る。例えば、当該移動体１００に対する総合点検を行ってからの経過期間が予め決められた所定期間に達している場合には、推定部４１２は、当該移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当すると推定し得る。また、例えば、当該移動体１００にブレーキパッド等の消耗部品を取り付けてからの当該移動体１００の走行距離が、当該消耗部品の耐用走行距離に達している場合には、推定部４１２は、当該移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当すると推定し得る。また、推定部４１２は、移動体１００が利用された際に取得される上述した走行データに基づいて、バッテリ１０８の劣化状態を推定してもよい。走行データは、上述したように、利用履歴記憶部４３６に記憶され得る。推定部４１２は、移動体１００に備えられたバッテリ１０８の残容量を走行データに基づいて推定し得る。また、推定部４１２は、移動体１００に備えられたバッテリ１０８の劣化状態を走行データに基づいて推定し得る。推定部４１２は、予め取得されたバッテリ劣化モデルに基づいて、バッテリ１０８の劣化状態を推定し得るが、これに限定さない。管理装置４００に備えられた予約受付部４１０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っていると推定部４１２によって推定された移動体１００の利用予約を制限する。本実施形態によれば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っていると推定された移動体１００の利用予約が制限され得るため、不具合のある移動体１００がユーザによって利用されるのをより効果的に防止し得る。 As described above, the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A can be discovered by a user or the like, but the management device 400 can estimate whether the mobile object 100 has reached the level of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. As described above, the management device 400 may include the estimation unit 412. The estimation unit 412 can estimate whether or not each mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A based on the maintenance history, usage history, etc. regarding each mobile body 100. For example, if the period of time that has elapsed since the comprehensive inspection of the mobile object 100 has reached a predetermined period, the estimation unit 412 estimates that the mobile object 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile object 100A. It is possible. Further, for example, if the mileage of the moving body 100 after attaching a consumable part such as a brake pad to the moving body 100 has reached the durable mileage of the consumable part, the estimating unit 412 It can be estimated that the mobile body 100 corresponds to the maintenance required mobile body 100A. Furthermore, the estimating unit 412 may estimate the deterioration state of the battery 108 based on the above-mentioned travel data acquired when the mobile object 100 is used. The travel data can be stored in the usage history storage section 436, as described above. Estimating unit 412 can estimate the remaining capacity of battery 108 provided in mobile object 100 based on travel data. Furthermore, the estimating unit 412 can estimate the deterioration state of the battery 108 provided in the mobile object 100 based on the driving data. The estimation unit 412 can estimate the deterioration state of the battery 108 based on a battery deterioration model acquired in advance, but is not limited thereto. The reservation accepting unit 410 provided in the management device 400 limits reservations for the mobile body 100 that has been estimated by the estimating unit 412 to fall under the maintenance required mobile body 100A. According to the present embodiment, reservations for use of the mobile body 100 estimated to fall under the maintenance required mobile body 100A can be restricted, so that it is more effective to prevent users from using the mobile body 100 with a problem. can be prevented.
　図９は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ４１において、管理装置４００に備えられた推定部４１２は、各々の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っているか否かを推定する。この後、ステップＳ４２に遷移する。 In step S41, the estimating unit 412 provided in the management device 400 estimates whether each mobile object 100 has reached the level of the maintenance required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S42.
　ステップＳ４２において、予約受付部４１０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っていると推定部４１２によって推定された移動体１００の利用予約を制限する。こうして、図９に示す処理を完了する。 In step S42, the reservation accepting unit 410 restricts reservations for the mobile body 100 that has been estimated by the estimating unit 412 to fall under the maintenance required mobile body 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 9 is completed.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４が備えられ得る。携帯端末２００から管理装置４００に要メンテナンス移動体情報が供給された場合、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報をメンテナンスメンバーに配信する。換言すれば、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、メンテナンス作業の受託を打診するための要メンテナンス情報を、メンテナンスメンバーに配信する。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the maintenance required information distribution unit 414. When the maintenance required moving body information is supplied from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 400, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required moving body 100A to the maintenance member. In other words, the maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 distributes maintenance-required information for requesting maintenance work to maintenance members.
　要メンテナンス情報には、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報が含まれ得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報には、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの移動体識別情報が含まれ得る。また、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報には、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報には、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが必要なメンテナンス作業を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報が含まれ得る。 The maintenance required information may include information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A. The information regarding the maintenance required mobile body 100A may include mobile body identification information of the maintenance required mobile body 100A. Further, the information regarding the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may include information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. Further, the information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A may include information indicating maintenance work required by the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Further, the information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A may include malfunction content information indicating the content of the malfunction occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A.
　図１０は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ５１において、携帯端末２００から管理装置４００に要メンテナンス移動体情報が提供される。この後、ステップＳ５２に遷移する。 In step S51, maintenance required mobile object information is provided from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S52.
　ステップＳ５２において、管理装置４００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報をメンテナンスメンバーに配信する。こうして、図１０に示す処理が完了する。 In step S52, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 distributes maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A to the maintenance members. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 10 is completed.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、判定部４１６が備えられ得る。判定部４１６は、メンテナンス移動体情報を管理装置４００に提供した携帯端末２００の所持者が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を行い得るか否かを、メンテナンスメンバー情報に基づいて判定し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the determination unit 416. The determining unit 416 determines based on the maintenance member information whether the owner of the mobile terminal 200 who has provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. obtain.
　携帯端末２００の所持者が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を行い得ないと判定部４１６が判定した場合、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、以下のような処理を行う。即ち、かかる場合、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を行い得るメンテナンスメンバーが所持する端末装置３００に要メンテナンス情報を配信する。 If the determination unit 416 determines that the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is unable to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 performs the following processing. That is, in such a case, the maintenance-required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance-required information to the terminal device 300 owned by a maintenance member who can perform maintenance work on the maintenance-required mobile object 100A.
　図１１は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ６１において、管理装置４００に備えられた判定部４１６は、以下のような処理を行う。即ち、判定部４１６は、メンテナンス移動体情報を管理装置４００に提供した携帯端末２００の所持者が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を行い得るか否かを、メンテナンスメンバー情報に基づいて判定する。携帯端末２００の所持者が当該メンテナンス作業を行い得ないと判定部４１６が判定した場合（ステップＳ６１においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ６２に遷移する。携帯端末２００の所持者が当該メンテナンス作業を行い得ると判定部４１６が判定した場合（ステップＳ６１においてＮＯ）、ステップＳ６３に遷移する。 In step S61, the determination unit 416 provided in the management device 400 performs the following processing. That is, the determination unit 416 determines whether the owner of the mobile terminal 200 that has provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, based on the maintenance member information. judge. If the determination unit 416 determines that the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is unable to perform the maintenance work (YES in step S61), the process moves to step S62. If the determination unit 416 determines that the owner of the mobile terminal 200 can perform the maintenance work (NO in step S61), the process moves to step S63.
　ステップＳ６２において、管理装置４００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を行い得るメンテナンスメンバーが所持する端末装置３００に要メンテナンス情報を配信する。 In step S62, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 distributes the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by a maintenance member who can perform maintenance work on the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
　ステップＳ６３において、管理装置４００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、メンテナンス移動体情報を管理装置４００に提供した携帯端末２００の所持者にメンテナンス作業を委託する。即ち、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、メンテナンス移動体情報を管理装置４００に提供した携帯端末２００に要メンテナンス情報を配信する。こうして、図１１に示す処理が完了する。 In step S63, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 entrusts the maintenance work to the owner of the mobile terminal 200 that provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400. That is, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance required information to the mobile terminal 200 that has provided the maintenance mobile object information to the management device 400. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 11 is completed.
　携帯端末２００に備えられた不具合内容判定部２２５は、移動体１００に生じている不具合の内容である不具合内容を判定し得る。不具合内容判定部２２５は、例えば、撮像部２０６によって取得された画像に基づいて、不具合内容を判定し得る。例えば、移動体１００の一部が撮像部２０６によって撮像される。移動体１００に備えられたタイヤの画像が撮像部２０６によって撮像された場合には、不具合内容判定部２２５は、当該タイヤにパンクが生じているか否かを判定し得る。不具合内容判定部２２５は、例えば、パンクが生じたタイヤを示す参照画像と、撮像部２０６によって取得された画像とを対比することによって、当該タイヤにパンクが生じているか否かを判定し得るが、これに限定されない。かかる参照画像は、例えば、携帯端末２００に備えられた記憶部２０４に予め記憶され得るが、これに限定されない。携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６は、不具合内容判定部２２５によって判定された不具合内容を、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示部２１０に表示し得る。移動体１００に生じている不具合内容がこのようにしてユーザに把握されてもよい。 The malfunction content determination unit 225 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can determine the malfunction content that is the content of the malfunction occurring in the mobile object 100. The malfunction content determination unit 225 can determine the malfunction content based on the image acquired by the imaging unit 206, for example. For example, a part of the moving body 100 is imaged by the imaging unit 206. When an image of a tire provided on the moving body 100 is captured by the imaging unit 206, the defect content determining unit 225 can determine whether or not the tire is punctured. The malfunction content determination unit 225 can determine whether or not the tire is punctured, for example, by comparing the reference image showing the tire with the puncture and the image acquired by the imaging unit 206. , but not limited to. Such a reference image may be stored in advance in the storage unit 204 provided in the mobile terminal 200, for example, but is not limited thereto. The display control unit 226 included in the mobile terminal 200 can display the defect content determined by the defect content determination unit 225 on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200 . In this way, the user may be able to understand the details of the problem occurring in the mobile object 100.
　図１２は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ７１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた撮像部２０６が、移動体１００の一部の画像を取得する。この後、ステップＳ７２に遷移する。 In step S71, the imaging unit 206 included in the mobile terminal 200 acquires an image of a portion of the moving object 100. After this, the process moves to step S72.
　ステップＳ７２において、携帯端末２００に備えられた不具合内容判定部２２５は、移動体１００に生じている不具合の内容である不具合内容を、撮像部２０６によって取得された画像に基づいて判定する。この後、ステップＳ７３に遷移する。 In step S72, the malfunction content determining unit 225 provided in the mobile terminal 200 determines the malfunction content, which is the content of the malfunction occurring in the mobile object 100, based on the image acquired by the imaging unit 206. After this, the process moves to step S73.
　ステップＳ７３において、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６が、不具合内容判定部２２５によって判定された不具合内容を示す不具合内容情報を表示部２１０に表示する。こうして、図１２に示す処理が完了する。 In step S73, the display control section 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays defect content information indicating the defect content determined by the defect content determination section 225 on the display section 210. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 12 is completed.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、通知部４１８が備えられ得る。通知部４１８は、一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が予約受付部４１０によって受け付けられている状態で、当該一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至った場合、以下のような処理を行い得る。かかる場合、通知部４１８は、利用可能な他の移動体１００である利用可能移動体１００Ｂへの利用予約の変更のための利用予約変更情報を、一の移動体１００の利用予約を行ったユーザが所持する携帯端末２００であるユーザ端末に通知する。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the notification unit 418. In a state where a usage reservation for one mobile body 100 is accepted by the reservation reception unit 410, when the one mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A, the notification unit 418 performs the following: The following processing can be performed. In such a case, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B, which is another available mobile body 100, to the user who made the usage reservation for the one mobile body 100. The user terminal, which is the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user, is notified.
　図１３は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ８１において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至った否かを判定する。一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至った場合（ステップＳ８１においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ８２に遷移する。一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っていない場合（ステップＳ８１においてＮＯ）、図１３に示す処理が完了する。 In step S81, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 determines whether one mobile object 100 has come to correspond to the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. When one mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A (YES in step S81), the process moves to step S82. If the one mobile body 100 has not reached the level of the maintenance required mobile body 100A (NO in step S81), the process shown in FIG. 13 is completed.
　ステップＳ８２において、制御部４０８は、当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられている状態であるか否かを判定する。制御部４０８は、当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられているか否かを、予約情報記憶部４３０に記憶された利用予約情報に基づいて判定し得る。当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられている場合には（ステップＳ８２においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ８３に遷移する。当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられていない場合には（ステップＳ８２においてＮＯ）、図１３に示す処理が完了する。 In step S82, the control unit 408 determines whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 is being accepted. The control unit 408 can determine whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted based on the usage reservation information stored in the reservation information storage unit 430. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted (YES in step S82), the process moves to step S83. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has not been accepted (NO in step S82), the process shown in FIG. 13 is completed.
　ステップＳ８３において、管理装置４００に備えられた通知部４１８は、以下のような処理を行う。即ち、通知部４１８は、利用可能な他の移動体１００である利用可能移動体１００Ｂへの利用予約の変更のための利用予約変更情報を、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの利用予約を行ったユーザが所持する携帯端末２００であるユーザ端末に通知する。この後、ステップＳ８４に遷移する。 In step S83, the notification unit 418 provided in the management device 400 performs the following processing. That is, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B, which is another available mobile body 100, to the user who has made the usage reservation for the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A. The user terminal, which is the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user, is notified. After this, the process moves to step S84.
　ステップＳ８４において、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６は、表示部２１０に利用予約変更情報を表示する。こうして、図１３に示す処理が完了する。 In step S84, the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays the usage reservation change information on the display unit 210. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 13 is completed.
　利用予約が行われている要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離未満の位置に利用可能移動体１００Ｂが存在する場合には、管理装置４００に備えられた通知部４１８は、以下のような処理を行う。即ち、かかる場合、通知部４１８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離未満の位置に存在する利用可能移動体１００Ｂへの利用予約の変更のための利用予約変更情報を、携帯端末（ユーザ端末）２００に通知する。当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離未満の位置に利用可能移動体１００Ｂが存在しない場合には、通知部４１８は、以下のような処理を行う。即ち、かかる場合、通知部４１８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離以上、第２距離未満の位置に存在する利用可能移動体１００Ｂへの利用予約の変更のための利用予約変更情報を携帯端末（ユーザ端末）２００に通知する。 If the usable mobile body 100B exists at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A for which the usage reservation has been made, the notification unit 418 provided in the management device 400 performs the following process. conduct. That is, in such a case, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information to the mobile terminal (user terminal) 200. If there is no usable moving object 100B at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A, the notification unit 418 performs the following processing. In other words, in such a case, the notification unit 418 transmits usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B that is located at a position of a first distance or more and less than a second distance from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A. The mobile terminal (user terminal) 200 is notified.
　図１４は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ９１において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至った否かを判定する。一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至った場合（ステップＳ９１においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ９２に遷移する。一の移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当するに至っていない場合（ステップＳ９１においてＮＯ）、図１４に示す処理が完了する。 In step S91, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 determines whether one mobile object 100 has come to correspond to the maintenance required mobile object 100A. When one mobile body 100 falls under the maintenance required mobile body 100A (YES in step S91), the process moves to step S92. If the one mobile body 100 has not reached the level of the maintenance required mobile body 100A (NO in step S91), the process shown in FIG. 14 is completed.
　ステップＳ９２において、制御部４０８は、当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられている状態であるか否かを判定する。制御部４０８は、当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられているか否かを、予約情報記憶部４３０に記憶された利用予約情報に基づいて判定し得る。当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられている場合には（ステップＳ９２においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ９３に遷移する。当該一の移動体１００に対しての利用予約が受け付けられていない場合には（ステップＳ９２においてＮＯ）、図１４に示す処理が完了する。 In step S92, the control unit 408 determines whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 is being accepted. The control unit 408 can determine whether or not a usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted based on the usage reservation information stored in the reservation information storage unit 430. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has been accepted (YES in step S92), the process moves to step S93. If the usage reservation for the one mobile object 100 has not been accepted (NO in step S92), the process shown in FIG. 14 is completed.
　ステップＳ９３において、制御部４０８は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離未満の位置に利用可能移動体１００Ｂが存在するか否かを判定する。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離未満の位置に利用可能移動体１００Ｂが存在する場合（ステップＳ９３においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ９４に遷移する。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離未満の位置に利用可能移動体１００Ｂが存在しない場合（ステップＳ９３においてＮＯ）、ステップＳ９５に遷移する。 In step S93, the control unit 408 determines whether the usable moving object 100B exists at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. If the usable mobile body 100B exists at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance required mobile body 100A (YES in step S93), the process moves to step S94. If the usable mobile body 100B does not exist at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance required mobile body 100A (NO in step S93), the process moves to step S95.
　ステップＳ９４において、通知部４１８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離未満の位置に存在する利用可能移動体１００Ｂへの利用予約の変更のための利用予約変更情報を携帯端末２００に通知する。この後、ステップＳ９６に遷移する。 In step S94, the notification unit 418 notifies the mobile terminal 200 of usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B existing at a position less than the first distance from the maintenance required mobile body 100A. . After this, the process moves to step S96.
　ステップＳ９５において、通知部４１８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａから第１距離以上、第２距離未満の位置に存在する利用可能移動体１００Ｂへの利用予約の変更のための利用予約変更情報を携帯端末２００に通知する。この後、ステップＳ９６に遷移する。 In step S95, the notification unit 418 carries usage reservation change information for changing the usage reservation to the available mobile body 100B that is located at a position of a first distance or more and less than a second distance from the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A. The terminal 200 is notified. After this, the process moves to step S96.
　ステップＳ９６において、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６は、表示部２１０に利用予約変更情報を表示する。こうして、図１４に示す処理が完了する。 In step S96, the display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 displays the usage reservation change information on the display unit 210. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 14 is completed.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付ける。上述したように、携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０は、受付部２１６によって受け付けられた要メンテナンス移動体情報を管理装置４００に提供する。上述したように、管理装置４００には、選定部４２０が備えられ得る。選定部４２０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報の配信先を選定し得る。配信先の数は、特に限定されない。選定部４２０は、要メンテナンス情報の配信先を、予め登録された複数のメンテナンスメンバーのうちから選定し得る。 As described above, the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A. As described above, the maintenance-required mobile object information providing unit 220 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides the maintenance-required mobile object information received by the reception unit 216 to the management device 400. As described above, the management device 400 may include the selection unit 420. The selection unit 420 can select a destination of maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A. The number of distribution destinations is not particularly limited. The selection unit 420 can select the destination of the maintenance-required information from among a plurality of pre-registered maintenance members.
　選定部４２０は、要メンテナンス移動体情報に対応する要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置と、メンテナンスメンバーの位置とに基づいて、要メンテナンス情報の配信先を選定し得る。選定部４２０は、例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａからの距離が予め決められた所定距離未満に位置するメンテナンスメンバーを、要メンテナンス情報の配信先として選定し得る。選定部４２０は、不具合内容情報と、メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報とに更に基づいて、要メンテナンス情報の配信先を選定し得る。選定部４２０は、不具合内容情報によって特定される不具合に対して対応可能なメンテナンスメンバーを、当該要メンテナンス情報の配信先として選定する。一方、選定部４２０は、不具合内容情報によって特定される不具合に対して対応し得ないメンテナンスメンバーを、当該要メンテナンス情報の配信先として選定しない。要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、選定部４２０によって選定されたメンテナンスメンバーが所持している端末装置３００に要メンテナンス情報を配信する。 The selection unit 420 can select the distribution destination of the maintenance-required information based on the position of the maintenance-required mobile object 100A corresponding to the maintenance-required mobile object information and the position of the maintenance member. The selection unit 420 may select, for example, a maintenance member who is located less than a predetermined distance from the maintenance-required mobile object 100A as the recipient of the maintenance-required information. The selection unit 420 can select a distribution destination for the maintenance required information based further on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. The selection unit 420 selects a maintenance member who can respond to the malfunction specified by the malfunction content information as a recipient of the maintenance required information. On the other hand, the selection unit 420 does not select a maintenance member who cannot respond to the problem specified by the problem content information as a recipient of the maintenance information. The maintenance required information distribution unit 414 distributes the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member selected by the selection unit 420.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、メンバー評価部４２２が備えられ得る。メンバー評価部４２２は、メンテナンスメンバーによって行われたメンテナンス作業に対する評価を示す情報である作業評価情報に基づいて、当該メンテナンスメンバーに対する評価を示す情報であるメンバー評価情報を生成し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the member evaluation section 422. The member evaluation unit 422 may generate member evaluation information, which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance member, based on work evaluation information, which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work performed by the maintenance member.
　作業評価情報には、例えば、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって提供されたメンテナンス作業の品質である作業品質の評価に関する情報が含まれ得る。当該メンテナンスメンバーが提供した作業品質が比較的高い場合には、メンバー評価部４２２は、当該メンテナンスメンバーに対する評価を比較的高く設定し得る。作業品質は、長期的な観点で判定されてもよい。即ち、一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの期間に基づいて、当該メンテナンス作業に対する作業品質が判定されてもよい。また、例えば、一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの当該一の移動体１００の走行距離に基づいて、当該メンテナンス作業に対する作業品質が判定されてもよい。 The work evaluation information may include, for example, information regarding the evaluation of work quality, which is the quality of the maintenance work provided by the maintenance member. If the quality of the work provided by the maintenance member is relatively high, the member evaluation unit 422 may set the evaluation of the maintenance member relatively high. Work quality may be determined from a long-term perspective. That is, the work quality of the maintenance work is determined based on the period until the one mobile object 100 again requires the same maintenance work as the one maintenance work performed on the one mobile object 100. It's okay. Further, for example, based on the distance traveled by the one moving body 100 until the same one maintenance work as the one maintenance work performed on the one moving body 100 is required again, , the work quality for the maintenance work may be determined.
　作業評価情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって提供されたメンテナンス作業の難易度の評価に関する情報が含まれ得る。当該メンテナンスメンバーが提供したメンテナンス作業の難易度が比較的高い場合には、メンバー評価部４２２は、当該メンテナンスメンバーに対する評価を比較的高く設定し得る。 The work evaluation information may include information regarding the evaluation of the difficulty level of the maintenance work provided by the maintenance member. If the difficulty level of the maintenance work provided by the maintenance member is relatively high, the member evaluation unit 422 may set the evaluation of the maintenance member relatively high.
　作業評価情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーの対応の迅速さの評価に関する情報が含まれ得る。当該メンテナンスメンバーの対応が迅速であった場合には、メンバー評価部４２２は、当該メンテナンスメンバーに対する評価を比較的高く設定し得る。 The work evaluation information may include information regarding the evaluation of the promptness of the maintenance member's response. If the maintenance member responds quickly, the member evaluation unit 422 may set a relatively high evaluation for the maintenance member.
　作業評価情報には、当該メンテナンスメンバーが選択した部品の適切さの評価に関する情報が含まれ得る。メンテナンス作業の際に当該メンテナンスメンバーが選択した部品が適切であった場合には、メンバー評価部４２２は、当該メンテナンスメンバーに対して比較的高い評価を設定し得る。上述したように、例えば、塩害が生じやすい地域で用いられる移動体１００に対しては、防錆処理が充分に施された部品を選択することが好ましい。また、上述したように、坂道が多い地域で用いられる移動体１００に対しては、耐久性が充分に高いブレーキパッドを選択することが好ましい。 The work evaluation information may include information regarding the evaluation of the suitability of the parts selected by the maintenance member. If the parts selected by the maintenance member during maintenance work are appropriate, the member evaluation unit 422 can set a relatively high evaluation for the maintenance member. As described above, for example, for the moving body 100 used in areas prone to salt damage, it is preferable to select parts that have been sufficiently rust-proofed. Further, as described above, it is preferable to select a brake pad with sufficiently high durability for the moving body 100 used in an area with many slopes.
　メンバー評価部４２２は、メンテナンスメンバーに関する複数の作業評価情報を総合的に評価することによって当該メンテナンスメンバーについてのメンバー評価情報を生成し得る。 The member evaluation unit 422 can generate member evaluation information about the maintenance member by comprehensively evaluating a plurality of pieces of work evaluation information about the maintenance member.
　作業評価情報は、移動体１００に関するメンテナンス履歴及び利用履歴のうちの少なくともいずれかに基づいて生成され得る。例えば、一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの期間は、当該一の移動体１００のメンテナンス履歴に基づいて把握され得る。また、例えば、一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの当該一の移動体１００の走行距離は、当該一の移動体１００の利用履歴に基づいて把握され得る。 The work evaluation information may be generated based on at least one of the maintenance history and usage history regarding the mobile object 100. For example, the period until one mobile body 100 requires maintenance work of the same content as one maintenance work performed on one mobile body 100 is determined based on the maintenance history of the one mobile body 100. It can be understood that Further, for example, the distance traveled by the one moving body 100 until the same one maintenance work that was performed on the one moving body 100 is required again is It can be grasped based on the usage history of one mobile object 100.
　選定部４２０は、メンバー評価部４２２によって生成されたメンバー評価情報に基づいてメンテナンスメンバーを選定し得る。選定部４２０は、例えば、評価が比較的高いメンテナンスメンバーを優先的に選択してもよい。 The selection unit 420 may select maintenance members based on the member evaluation information generated by the member evaluation unit 422. For example, the selection unit 420 may preferentially select maintenance members with relatively high evaluations.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、報酬情報入力受付部３１６が備えられ得る。報酬情報入力受付部３１６は、当該メンテナンスメンバーがメンテナンス作業を行った場合の報酬に関する情報である報酬情報の入力を受け付け得る。かかる報酬情報は、複数種のメンテナンス作業の各々に対して設定され得る。報酬情報の入力の受け付けは、以下のようにして行われ得る。即ち、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０が、報酬情報を入力するための入力画面を、端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示する。報酬情報が、当該入力画面上においてメンテナンスメンバーによって入力され得る。こうして入力される報酬情報が、報酬情報入力受付部３１６によって受け付けられ得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the remuneration information input reception unit 316. The remuneration information input receiving unit 316 can receive input of remuneration information that is information regarding remuneration when the maintenance member performs maintenance work. Such remuneration information can be set for each of multiple types of maintenance work. Reception of input of remuneration information may be performed as follows. That is, the display control section 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays an input screen for inputting remuneration information on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300. Remuneration information may be input by the maintenance member on the input screen. The remuneration information input in this manner can be accepted by the remuneration information input reception unit 316.
　報酬情報入力受付部３１６によって報酬情報の入力が受け付けられた場合には、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、当該メンテナンスメンバーに関する報酬情報を管理装置４００に供給する。各々のメンテナンスメンバーに関する報酬情報は、上述したように、メンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２に記憶され得る。上述したように、報酬情報は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが提供し得る複数種のメンテナンス作業の各々に対して設定され得る。 When the input of remuneration information is accepted by the remuneration information input reception unit 316, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies remuneration information regarding the maintenance member to the management device 400. Remuneration information regarding each maintenance member may be stored in the maintenance member information storage unit 432, as described above. As described above, remuneration information can be set for each of a plurality of types of maintenance work that can be provided by the maintenance member.
　選定部４２０は、メンテナンスメンバーに対応する報酬情報に基づいて、メンテナンスメンバーを選定し得る。例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要するメンテナンス作業を行い得るメンテナンスメンバーが複数存在する場合、選定部４２０は、当該メンテナンス作業に対する報酬が最も低いメンテナンスメンバーを選択してもよい。 The selection unit 420 may select maintenance members based on remuneration information corresponding to the maintenance members. For example, if there are multiple maintenance members who can perform the maintenance work required by the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the selection unit 420 may select the maintenance member who has the lowest remuneration for the maintenance work.
　図１５は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１０１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ１０２に遷移する。 In step S101, the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S102.
　ステップＳ１０２において、携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部２２０が、管理装置４００に要メンテナンス移動体情報を提供する。この後、ステップＳ１０３に遷移する。 In step S102, the maintenance required mobile object information providing unit 220 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides the maintenance required mobile object information to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S103.
　ステップＳ１０３において、管理装置４００に備えられた選定部４２０が、要メンテナンス情報の配信先を選定する。この後、ステップＳ１０４に遷移する。 In step S103, the selection unit 420 included in the management device 400 selects the destination of the maintenance required information. After this, the process moves to step S104.
　ステップＳ１０４において、選定部４２０によって選定された配信先に管理装置４００が要メンテナンス情報を配信する。こうして、図１５に示す処理が完了する。 In step S104, the management device 400 distributes the maintenance required information to the distribution destination selected by the selection unit 420. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 15 is completed.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、完了情報受付部３１８が備えられ得る。完了情報受付部３１８は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業が完了したことを示す作業完了情報の入力を受け付け得る。完了情報受付部３１８によって作業完了情報の入力が受け付けられた場合には、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、当該作業完了情報を管理装置４００に供給する。各々のメンテナンス作業に対する作業完了情報は、管理装置４００に備えられたメンテナンス履歴記憶部４３４等に記憶され得る。管理装置４００は、メンテナンス作業が完了した移動体１００が位置していた貸し出しポート２２の位置をメンテナンスメンバーの位置として記憶してもよい。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the completion information reception unit 318. The completion information receiving unit 318 can receive input of work completion information indicating that the maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A has been completed. When the input of work completion information is accepted by the completion information reception unit 318, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies the work completion information to the management device 400. Work completion information for each maintenance work can be stored in a maintenance history storage unit 434 or the like provided in the management device 400. The management device 400 may store the location of the rental port 22 where the mobile object 100 for which the maintenance work has been completed was located as the location of the maintenance member.
　図１６は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１１１において、端末装置３００に備えられた完了情報受付部３１８は、作業完了情報の入力を受け付け得る。この後、ステップＳ１１２に遷移する。 In step S111, the completion information receiving unit 318 provided in the terminal device 300 can receive input of work completion information. After this, the process moves to step S112.
　ステップＳ１１２において、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、作業完了情報を管理装置４００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ１１３に遷移する。 In step S112, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies work completion information to the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S113.
　ステップＳ１１３において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、作業完了情報をメンテナンス履歴記憶部４３４等に記憶する。この後、ステップＳ１１４に遷移する。 In step S113, the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 stores the work completion information in the maintenance history storage unit 434 or the like. After this, the process moves to step S114.
　ステップＳ１１４において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、メンテナンス作業が完了した移動体１００が位置していた貸し出しポート２２の位置をメンテナンスメンバーの位置として記憶する。こうして、図１６に示す処理が完了する。 In step S114, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 stores the position of the rental port 22 where the mobile object 100 for which the maintenance work has been completed was located as the position of the maintenance member. In this way, the processing shown in FIG. 16 is completed.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、選定部４２０が備えられ得る。上述したように、選定部４２０は、要メンテナンス情報の配信先を、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置と、メンテナンスメンバーの位置とに基づいて、予め登録された複数の前記メンテナンスメンバーのうちから選定する。選定部４２０は、例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａからの距離が予め決められた所定距離未満に位置するメンテナンスメンバーを、要メンテナンス情報の配信先として選定し得る。メンテナンスメンバーの位置は、例えば、メンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２に予め登録され得るが、これに限定されない。メンテナンスメンバーによって所持される端末装置３００の現在の位置を示す情報が、当該端末装置３００から管理装置４００に供給される場合には、かかる現在位置に基づいて当該メンテナンスメンバーの位置が把握されてもよい。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the selection unit 420. As described above, the selection unit 420 selects the distribution destination of the maintenance-required information from among the plurality of maintenance members registered in advance, based on the location of the maintenance-required mobile object 100A and the location of the maintenance member. . The selection unit 420 may select, for example, a maintenance member who is located less than a predetermined distance from the maintenance-required mobile object 100A as the recipient of the maintenance-required information. The location of the maintenance member may be registered in advance in the maintenance member information storage unit 432, for example, but is not limited thereto. If information indicating the current location of a terminal device 300 owned by a maintenance member is supplied from the terminal device 300 to the management device 400, the location of the maintenance member may be grasped based on the current location. good.
　選定部４２０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報と、メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報とに更に基づいて、要メンテナンス情報の配信先を選定してもよい。 The selection unit 420 selects the delivery destination of the maintenance information based on defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A and available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. may be selected.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４が備えられ得る。上述したように、要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４は、選定部４２０によって選定されたメンテナンスメンバーが所持している端末装置３００に要メンテナンス情報を配信し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the maintenance required information distribution unit 414. As described above, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 can distribute the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member selected by the selection unit 420.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、表示制御部３３０が備えられ得る。表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業を示す情報を、管理装置４００から配信される要メンテナンス情報に基づいて表示部３１０に表示し得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the display control section 330. The display control unit 330 can display information indicating maintenance work on the display unit 310 based on the maintenance required information distributed from the management device 400.
　図１７は、表示画面の例を示す図である。 FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
　表示制御部３３０は、表示部３１０に表示画面３３２を表示し得る。表示画面３３２には、地図３３４が表示され得る。表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業を示す情報３３６を当該地図３３４上に表示し得る。メンテナンス作業を示す情報３３６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置に応じた位置に表示され得る。 The display control unit 330 can display a display screen 332 on the display unit 310. A map 334 may be displayed on the display screen 332. The display control unit 330 can display information 336 indicating maintenance work on the map 334. Information 336 indicating maintenance work may be displayed at a position corresponding to the position of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
　表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業に応じた図形（記号、マーク）３３８Ｇ、３３８Ｂ、３３８Ｐ、３３８Ｖ、３３８Ｙを表示部３１０に表示し得る。表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業の種類に応じた態様の図形３３８Ｇ、３３８Ｂ、３３８Ｐ、３３８Ｖ、３３８Ｙを表示部３１０に表示し得る。図形を区別せずに説明する際には、符号３３８を用い、個々の図形を区別して説明する際には、符号３３８Ｇ、３３８Ｂ、３３８Ｐ、３３８Ｖ、３３８Ｙを用いる。表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業の種類に応じた色の図形３３８を表示部３１０に表示してもよい。例えば、複数のメンテナンス作業のうちの第１種類のメンテナンス作業を示す図形３３８には、第１色が付され得る。複数のメンテナンス作業のうちの第２種類のメンテナンス作業を示す図形３３８には、第２色が付され得る。複数のメンテナンス作業のうちの第３種類のメンテナンス作業を示す図形３３８には、第３色が付され得る。複数のメンテナンス作業のうちの第４種類のメンテナンス作業を示す図形３３８には、第４色が付され得る。複数のメンテナンス作業のうちの第５種類のメンテナンス作業を示す図形３３８には、第５色が付され得る。 The display control unit 330 can display graphics (symbols, marks) 338G, 338B, 338P, 338V, and 338Y on the display unit 310 according to the maintenance work. The display control unit 330 can display graphics 338G, 338B, 338P, 338V, and 338Y on the display unit 310 in a manner corresponding to the type of maintenance work. When explaining the figures without distinguishing them, the reference numeral 338 is used, and when explaining the individual figures separately, the numbers 338G, 338B, 338P, 338V, and 338Y are used. The display control unit 330 may display a graphic 338 in a color corresponding to the type of maintenance work on the display unit 310. For example, the first color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the first type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance work. A second color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the second type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works. A third color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the third type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works. A fourth color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the fourth type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works. A fifth color may be assigned to the graphic 338 indicating the fifth type of maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works.
　表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業の種類を示す文字情報３４０を図形３３８とともに表示し得る。 The display control unit 330 can display text information 340 indicating the type of maintenance work along with the graphic 338.
　メンテナンス作業の種類が例えば「点検」である場合には、例えば緑色の図形３３８Ｇによって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。メンテナンス作業の種類が例えば「充電」である場合には、例えば青色の図形３３８Ｂによって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。メンテナンス作業の種類が例えば「整備」である場合には、例えば桃色の図形３３８Ｐによって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。メンテナンス作業の種類が例えば「移動」である場合には、例えば紫色の図形３３８Ｖによって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。メンテナンス作業の種類が例えば「清掃」である場合には、例えば黄色の図形３３８Ｙによって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。 For example, when the type of maintenance work is "inspection", the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a green figure 338G. For example, when the type of maintenance work is "charging", the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a blue figure 338B. For example, when the type of maintenance work is "maintenance", the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a pink figure 338P. For example, when the type of maintenance work is "movement", the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a purple figure 338V. For example, when the type of maintenance work is "cleaning", the maintenance work can be indicated by, for example, a yellow figure 338Y.
　なお、メンテナンス作業の種類に応じた態様は、色に限定されない。例えば、メンテナンス作業の種類に応じた態様は、例えば形状であってもよい。即ち、メンテナンス作業の種類に応じた形状の図形３３８を表示部３１０に表示してもよい。 Note that the mode depending on the type of maintenance work is not limited to color. For example, the aspect depending on the type of maintenance work may be, for example, the shape. That is, a graphic 338 having a shape corresponding to the type of maintenance work may be displayed on the display unit 310.
　表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業に要する作業量（工数）に応じた態様で図形３３８を表示部３１０に表示し得る。例えば、メンテナンス作業に要する作業量に応じた大きさで図形３３８が表示部３１０に表示されてもよい。例えば、メンテナンス作業に要する作業量が比較的小さい場合には、比較的小さいサイズの図形３３８によって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。例えば、メンテナンス作業に要する作業量が中程度である場合には、中程度のサイズの図形３３８によって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。例えば、メンテナンス作業に要する作業量が比較的大きい場合には、比較的大きいサイズの図形３３８によって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。 The display control unit 330 can display the graphic 338 on the display unit 310 in a manner according to the amount of work (man-hours) required for the maintenance work. For example, the graphic 338 may be displayed on the display unit 310 in a size that corresponds to the amount of work required for maintenance work. For example, if the amount of work required for maintenance work is relatively small, the maintenance work may be indicated by a relatively small size graphic 338. For example, if the amount of work required for maintenance work is medium, the maintenance work may be indicated by a medium-sized graphic 338. For example, if the amount of work required for maintenance work is relatively large, the maintenance work may be indicated by a relatively large-sized graphic 338.
　表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａとメンテナンスメンバーとの間の距離に応じた態様で図形３３８を表示部３１０に表示してもよい。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａとメンテナンスメンバーとの間の距離に応じたサイズの図形３３８が表示部３１０に表示されてもよい。例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａとメンテナンスメンバーとの間の距離が比較的小さい場合には、比較的大きいサイズの図形３３８によって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａとメンテナンスメンバーとの間の距離が中程度である場合には、中程度のサイズの図形３３８によって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａとメンテナンスメンバーとの間の距離が比較的大きい場合には、比較的大きいサイズの図形３３８によって当該メンテナンス作業が示され得る。 The display control unit 330 may display the graphic 338 on the display unit 310 in a manner according to the distance between the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A and the maintenance member. A graphic 338 having a size corresponding to the distance between the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A and the maintenance member may be displayed on the display unit 310. For example, when the distance between the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A and the maintenance member is relatively small, the maintenance work can be indicated by a relatively large-sized graphic 338. For example, if the distance between the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A and the maintenance member is medium, the maintenance work can be indicated by a medium-sized figure 338. For example, if the distance between the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A and the maintenance member is relatively large, the maintenance work can be indicated by a relatively large-sized graphic 338.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、受付部３１５が備えられ得る。受付部３１５は、表示部３１０に表示されたメンテナンス作業に対してのメンテナンスメンバーによる受託の操作の入力である受託操作入力を受け付ける。換言すれば、受付部３１５は、表示部３１０に表示されたメンテナンス作業に対してのメンテナンスメンバーによる承諾の操作の入力である承諾操作入力を受け付ける。受付部３１５は、表示部３１０に表示された図形３３８に対するメンテナンスメンバーによる操作に基づいて、メンテナンス作業に対しての受託操作入力を受け付け得る。表示部３１０に表示された図形３３８がメンテナンスメンバーによってタップされることによって、当該図形３３８によって示されたメンテナンス作業が当該メンテナンスメンバーによって受託され得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the reception section 315. The receiving unit 315 receives a commissioned operation input, which is an input of a commissioned operation by a maintenance member for the maintenance work displayed on the display unit 310. In other words, the accepting unit 315 accepts a consent operation input, which is an input of a maintenance member's consent operation for the maintenance work displayed on the display unit 310. The reception unit 315 can accept an input of commissioned operation for maintenance work based on the maintenance member's operation on the graphic 338 displayed on the display unit 310. When the maintenance member taps the graphic 338 displayed on the display unit 310, the maintenance member can undertake the maintenance work indicated by the graphic 338.
　一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが複数のメンテナンス作業を要する場合もある。表示制御部３３０は、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが複数のメンテナンス作業を要する場合、以下のように表示し得る。即ち、かかる場合、表示制御部３３０は、これら複数のメンテナンス作業のうちの受託済みのメンテナンス作業と、未受託のメンテナンス作業とを、異なる態様で表示部３１０に表示し得る。例えば、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択されたメンテナンス作業が強調表示され、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択されていないメンテナンス作業が点滅表示されてもよい。メンテナンス作業の強調表示は、例えば、図形３３８の色の濃度を増加させることによって行われ得るが、これに限定されない。 A single maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may require multiple maintenance operations. The display control unit 330 may display the following when one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A requires multiple maintenance operations. That is, in such a case, the display control unit 330 can display the commissioned maintenance work and the uncontracted maintenance work among the plurality of maintenance works in different manners on the display unit 310. For example, the maintenance work selected by the maintenance member may be highlighted, and the maintenance work not selected by the maintenance member may be displayed blinking. Highlighting the maintenance task may be performed, for example, but not limited to, by increasing the color intensity of the graphic 338.
　例えば、当該メンテナンスメンバーが、「整備」については対応可能であるが、「移動」については対応し得ない場合、「整備」については受託可能であるが、「移動」については受託し得ない。当該メンテナンスメンバーによって例えば「整備」を示す図形３３８Ｐが選択された場合、図形３３８Ｐが強調表示され、「移動」を示す図形３３８Ｖが点滅表示されてもよい。強調表示は、例えば、当該図形３３８Ｐの色の濃度を増加させることによって行われ得るが、これに限定されない。 For example, if the maintenance member is able to handle "maintenance" but not "movement", he or she may be entrusted with "maintenance" but not "movement". For example, when the maintenance member selects the graphic 338P indicating "maintenance", the graphic 338P may be highlighted and the graphic 338V indicating "move" may be displayed blinking. Highlighting may be performed, for example, by increasing the color density of the graphic 338P, but is not limited thereto.
　図１８は、表示画面の例を示す図である。図１８に示す例においては、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択された「整備」を示す図形３３８Ｐが強調表示されている。当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択されていない「移動」を示す図形３３８Ｖは点滅表示されている。 FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. In the example shown in FIG. 18, a graphic 338P indicating "maintenance" selected by the maintenance member is highlighted. A graphic 338V indicating "move" that has not been selected by the maintenance member is blinking.
　「整備」のメンテナンス作業を示す図形３３８Ｐが当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択され、「移動」のメンテナンス作業を示す図形３３８Ｖが他のメンテナンスメンバーによって選択された場合、これらのメンテナンス作業に対する委託が成立し得る。即ち、複数のメンテナンスメンバーが共同で複数のメンテナンス作業を受託し得る。 If the graphic 338P indicating maintenance work of "maintenance" is selected by the maintenance member and the graphic 338V indicating maintenance work of "movement" is selected by another maintenance member, entrustment of these maintenance works can be established. That is, multiple maintenance members can jointly undertake multiple maintenance tasks.
　なお、「整備」のメンテナンス作業が当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択されたタイミングから所定時間が経過しても、「移動」のメンテナンス作業が他のメンテナンスメンバーによって選択されない場合、以下のようになる。即ち、かかる場合、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択された「整備」のメンテナンス作業は、キャンセルされ得る。 Furthermore, if the maintenance work of "Movement" is not selected by another maintenance member even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when the maintenance work of "Maintenance" was selected by the maintenance member, the following will occur. That is, in such a case, the "maintenance" maintenance work selected by the maintenance member may be cancelled.
　表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業を示す情報３３６を表示部３１０に表示する際、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す情報を表示部３１０に選択的に表示し得る。当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報は、例えば、端末装置３００に備えられた記憶部３０４に予め記憶され得る。当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業は、当該メンテナンスメンバーに関する対応可能作業情報に基づいて把握され得る。このため、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業と、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得ないメンテナンス作業とが、管理装置４００から供給される要メンテナンス情報のうちに含まれている場合であっても、以下のようになる。即ち、表示制御部３３０は、かかる場合であっても、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業のみを表示部３１０に表示し得る。 When displaying the information 336 indicating maintenance work on the display unit 310, the display control unit 330 can selectively display on the display unit 310 information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. Available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle may be stored in advance in the storage unit 304 provided in the terminal device 300, for example. The maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle can be grasped based on the available work information regarding the maintenance member. Therefore, even if maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle and maintenance tasks that the maintenance member cannot handle are included in the maintenance required information supplied from the management device 400, It will look like this: That is, even in such a case, the display control unit 330 can display only the maintenance work that can be handled by the maintenance member on the display unit 310.
　図１９は、表示画面の例を示す図である。図１９に示す例においては、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得るメンテナンス作業のみが表示されている。例えば、当該メンテナンスメンバーが「清掃」のメンテナンス作業のみを行い得る場合、「点検」、「充電」、「整備」、「移動」のメンテナンス作業は表示画面３３２に表示されない。 FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. In the example shown in FIG. 19, only maintenance tasks that can be handled by the maintenance member are displayed. For example, if the maintenance member can only perform the maintenance work of "cleaning", the maintenance work of "inspection", "charging", "maintenance", and "movement" will not be displayed on the display screen 332.
　一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要するメンテナンス作業が複数である場合、表示制御部３３０は、以下のようにしてもよい。即ち、かかる場合、表示制御部３３０は、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てに対して当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得る場合にのみ、当該一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要するメンテナンス作業を表示してもよい。即ち、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業のうちのいずれかに当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得ない場合、表示制御部３３０は、当該一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てを表示しない。上述したように、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報は、例えば、端末装置３００に備えられた記憶部３０４に予め記憶され得る。一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てに対して当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能であるか否かは、当該メンテナンスメンバーに関する対応可能作業情報に基づいて把握され得る。従って、表示制御部３３０は、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てに対して対応可能である場合に、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要するメンテナンス作業を表示部３１０に表示し得る。 When a single maintenance-requiring moving body 100A requires multiple maintenance operations, the display control unit 330 may perform the following operations. That is, in such a case, the display control unit 330 displays the information that the one maintenance-requiring moving object 100A requires only when the maintenance member can handle all of the plurality of maintenance tasks that the one maintenance-requiring moving object 100A requires. Maintenance work may also be displayed. That is, if the maintenance member cannot perform any of the maintenance work required by one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A, the display control unit 330 displays the maintenance work required by one maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. Don't show all your work. As described above, the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle may be stored in advance in the storage unit 304 provided in the terminal device 300, for example. Whether or not the maintenance member is capable of handling all of the plurality of maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A can be determined based on the available work information regarding the maintenance member. Therefore, the display control unit 330 displays the maintenance work required by the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A on the display unit 310 when the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A is capable of handling all of the plurality of maintenance works required. It is possible.
　図２０は、表示画面の例を示す図である。例えば、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが、「整備」のメンテナンス作業と、「移動」のメンテナンス作業とを要する場合を例に説明する。当該メンテナンスメンバーが、「整備」のメンテナンス作業を行い得る一方、「移動」のメンテナンス作業を行い得ない場合には、以下のようになる。即ち、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている「整備」のメンテナンス作業と「移動」のメンテナンス作業とのいずれもが表示部３１０に表示されない。 FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. For example, a case will be described in which one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A requires maintenance work of "maintenance" and maintenance work of "movement". If the maintenance member can perform "maintenance" maintenance work but cannot perform "transfer" maintenance work, the following will occur. That is, neither the "maintenance" maintenance work nor the "movement" maintenance work occurring on the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A is displayed on the display unit 310.
　表示制御部３３０は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業と、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得ないメンテナンス作業とを異なる態様で表示部３１０に表示してもよい。上述したように、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報は、例えば、端末装置３００に備えられた記憶部３０４に予め記憶され得る。当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業は、当該メンテナンスメンバーに関する対応可能作業情報に基づいて把握され得る。従って、表示制御部３３０は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業と、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得ないメンテナンス作業とを異なる態様で表示部３１０に表示し得る。例えば、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得ないメンテナンス作業をグレーアウト表示してもよい。 The display control unit 330 may display maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle and maintenance tasks that the maintenance member cannot handle on the display unit 310 in different ways. As described above, the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle may be stored in advance in the storage unit 304 provided in the terminal device 300, for example. The maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle can be grasped based on the available work information regarding the maintenance member. Therefore, the display control unit 330 can display maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle and maintenance tasks that the maintenance member cannot handle in different ways on the display unit 310. For example, maintenance tasks that cannot be handled by the maintenance member may be displayed in gray.
　図２１は、表示画面の例を示す図である。当該メンテナンスメンバーが「移動」のメンテナンス作業に対応し得ない場合には、図２１に示すように、「移動」のメンテナンス作業が例えばグレーアウト表示され得る。 FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. If the maintenance member cannot handle the "movement" maintenance work, the "movement" maintenance work may be displayed in gray out, for example, as shown in FIG. 21.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、受託情報供給部３２０が備えられ得る。受託情報供給部３２０は、受託操作入力が受付部３１５によって受け付けられた場合に、メンテナンス作業に対しての受託操作入力がメンテナンスメンバーによって行われたことを示す受託情報を管理装置４００に供給する。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the entrusted information supply unit 320. When the commissioned operation input is accepted by the reception unit 315, the commissioned information supply unit 320 supplies the management device 400 with commissioned information indicating that the commissioned operation input for the maintenance work was performed by a maintenance member.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、処理部４２３が備えられ得る。処理部４２３は、受託情報に基づいてメンテナンスメンバーへの委託を成立させ得る。一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要するメンテナンス作業が複数である場合、処理部４２３は、以下のような処理を行ってもよい。即ち、処理部４２３は、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てに対しての受託が一又は二以上のメンテナンスメンバーによって行われた場合に、これらのメンテナンス作業のメンテナンスメンバーへの委託を成立させてもよい。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the processing unit 423. The processing unit 423 can entrust the maintenance member to the maintenance member based on the entrustment information. When a single maintenance-requiring moving object 100A requires multiple maintenance operations, the processing unit 423 may perform the following processing. That is, when one or more maintenance members are entrusted with all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the processing unit 423 assigns these maintenance tasks to the maintenance members. The commission may be established.
　図２２は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１２１において、管理装置４００に備えられた選定部４２０が、要メンテナンス情報の配信先を、予め登録された複数のメンテナンスメンバーのうちから選定する。この後、ステップＳ１２２に遷移する。 In step S121, the selection unit 420 included in the management device 400 selects the destination of the required maintenance information from among a plurality of pre-registered maintenance members. After this, the process moves to step S122.
　ステップＳ１２２において、管理装置４００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報配信部４１４が、選定部４２０によって選定されたメンテナンスメンバーが所持している端末装置３００に、要メンテナンス情報を配信する。この後、ステップＳ１２３に遷移する。 In step S122, the maintenance required information distribution unit 414 provided in the management device 400 distributes the maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 owned by the maintenance member selected by the selection unit 420. After this, the process moves to step S123.
　ステップＳ１２３において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業を示す情報を要メンテナンス情報に基づいて表示部３１０に表示する。この後、ステップＳ１２４に遷移する。 In step S123, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays information indicating maintenance work on the display unit 310 based on the maintenance required information. After this, the process moves to step S124.
　ステップＳ１２４において、端末装置３００に備えられた受付部３１５は、表示部３１０に表示されたメンテナンス作業に対してのメンテナンスメンバーによる受託の操作の入力である受託操作入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ１２５に遷移する。 In step S124, the receiving unit 315 provided in the terminal device 300 receives a commissioned operation input, which is an input of a commissioned operation by a maintenance member for the maintenance work displayed on the display unit 310. After this, the process moves to step S125.
　ステップＳ１２５において、端末装置３００に備えられた受託情報供給部３２０は、メンテナンス作業に対しての受託操作入力がメンテナンスメンバーによって行われたことを示す受託情報を管理装置４００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ１２６に遷移する。 In step S125, the consignment information supply unit 320 provided in the terminal device 300 supplies the management device 400 with consignment information indicating that a maintenance member has performed a consignment operation input for the maintenance work. After this, the process moves to step S126.
　ステップＳ１２６において、管理装置４００に備えられた処理部４２３は、受託情報に基づいてメンテナンスメンバーへの委託を成立させる。こうして、図２２に示す処理が完了する。 In step S126, the processing unit 423 provided in the management device 400 establishes entrustment to the maintenance member based on the entrustment information. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 22 is completed.
　図２３は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが複数のメンテナンス作業を要する場合の例が図２３には示されている。 FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment. FIG. 23 shows an example where one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A requires multiple maintenance operations.
　ステップＳ１３１において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業を示す情報を表示部３１０に表示する。この後、ステップＳ１３２に遷移する。 In step S131, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays information indicating maintenance work on the display unit 310. After this, the process moves to step S132.
　ステップＳ１３２において、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業のうちの一のメンテナンス作業が、メンテナンスメンバーによって選択される。この後、ステップＳ１３３に遷移する。 In step S132, one of the maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A is selected by the maintenance member. After this, the process moves to step S133.
　ステップＳ１３３において、表示制御部３３０は、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択されたメンテナンス作業を強調表示する。 In step S133, the display control unit 330 highlights the maintenance work selected by the maintenance member.
　ステップＳ１３４において、表示制御部３３０は、当該メンテナンスメンバーによって選択されていないメンテナンス作業を点滅表示する。こうして、図２３に示す処理が完了する。 In step S134, the display control unit 330 blinks and displays maintenance tasks that have not been selected by the maintenance member. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 23 is completed.
　図２４は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１４１において、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を、管理装置４００から配信された要メンテナンス情報のうちから抽出する。この後、ステップＳ１４２に遷移する。 In step S141, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 extracts maintenance tasks that the maintenance member can handle from among the required maintenance information distributed from the management device 400. After this, the process moves to step S142.
　ステップＳ１４２において、表示制御部３３０は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す情報を表示部３１０に表示する。こうして、図２４に示す処理が完了する。 In step S142, the display control unit 330 displays information indicating maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle on the display unit 310. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 24 is completed.
　図２５は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要するメンテナンス作業が複数である場合の例が、図２５には示されている。 FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment. FIG. 25 shows an example where a single maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A requires multiple maintenance operations.
　ステップＳ１５１において、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てに対して当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得るか否かを判定する。一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てに対して当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得る場合には（ステップＳ１５１においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ１５２に遷移する。一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てに対して当該メンテナンスメンバーが対応し得ない場合には（ステップＳ１５１においてＮＯ）、ステップＳ１５３に遷移する。 In step S151, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 determines whether the maintenance member can handle all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. If the maintenance member can handle all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (YES in step S151), the process moves to step S152. If the maintenance member cannot handle all of the multiple maintenance tasks required by one maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (NO in step S151), the process moves to step S153.
　ステップＳ１５２において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、当該一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てを表示する。こうして、図２５に示す処理が完了する。 In step S152, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays all of the plurality of maintenance tasks required by the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 25 is completed.
　ステップＳ１５３において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、当該一の要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが要する複数のメンテナンス作業の全てを表示しない。こうして、図２５に示す処理が完了する。 In step S153, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 does not display all of the plurality of maintenance tasks required by the one maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 25 is completed.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には画像取得部３２２が備えられ得る。画像取得部３２２は、撮像部３０６によって取得される画像を取得し得る。画像取得部３２２によって取得された画像は、管理装置４００に提供され得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the image acquisition unit 322. The image acquisition unit 322 can acquire the image acquired by the imaging unit 306. The image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322 may be provided to the management device 400.
　管理装置４００には、上述したように、移動体判定部４１７が備えられ得る。移動体判定部４１７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれているか否かを判定し得る。移動体判定部４１７は、例えば、端末装置３００の現在の位置に関する情報と、当該端末装置３００に備えられた画像取得部３２２によって取得される画像と、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置に関する情報とに基づいて、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれているか否かを判定し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the mobile object determination section 417. The moving object determination unit 417 can determine whether the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image. The mobile object determination unit 417, for example, uses information regarding the current position of the terminal device 300, an image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322 provided in the terminal device 300, and information regarding the position of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Based on this, it can be determined whether the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image.
　移動体判定部４１７は、端末装置３００の現在の位置に関する情報と、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置に関する情報とに基づいて、当該メンテナンスメンバーが当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの近傍に位置しているか否かを判定し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置に関する情報には、例えば、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａをロックしているポートロック機構３８の管理番号等が含まれ得る。 Based on the information regarding the current position of the terminal device 300 and the information regarding the position of the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the mobile object determination unit 417 determines whether the maintenance member is located near the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. It can be determined whether or not. The information regarding the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A may include, for example, the management number of the port locking mechanism 38 that locks the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A.
　移動体判定部４１７は、端末装置３００に備えられた画像取得部３２２によって取得される画像に映っている管理番号等に基づいて、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれているか否かを判定し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれていることが移動体判定部４１７によって判定された場合、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報を端末装置３００に提供する。より具体的には、制御部４０８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの当該画像における位置を示す情報を、端末装置３００に供給し得る。 The mobile object determination unit 417 determines whether or not the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A is included in the image based on the management number etc. appearing in the image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322 provided in the terminal device 300. can be determined. When the moving object determining section 417 determines that the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image, the control section 408 provided in the management device 400 transmits information regarding the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A to the terminal device 300. Provided to. More specifically, the control unit 408 can supply information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image to the terminal device 300.
　移動体１００に備えられた情報提示部１１０に備えられたＱＲコード（登録商標）が端末装置３００によって読み取られることによって、画像に含まれている複数の移動体１００のうちのいずれの移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａであるかが判定されてもよい。即ち、移動体１００に備えられたＱＲコード（登録商標）が、端末装置３００に備えられた撮像部３０６によって撮像される。当該端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、当該ＱＲコード（登録商標）によって提示される情報を解析することによって、当該移動体１００に関する情報を取得する。制御部３１４は、当該移動体１００に関する情報を管理装置４００に提供する。管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、端末装置３００から供給された情報と、移動体情報記憶部４２８に記憶された情報とに基づいて、当該移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａであるか否かを判定し得る。 By reading the QR code (registered trademark) provided in the information presentation unit 110 provided in the mobile object 100 by the terminal device 300, which mobile object 100 among the plurality of mobile objects 100 included in the image is read. It may be determined whether the mobile body 100A requires maintenance. That is, the QR code (registered trademark) provided in the mobile object 100 is imaged by the imaging unit 306 provided in the terminal device 300. The control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 acquires information regarding the mobile object 100 by analyzing the information presented by the QR code (registered trademark). The control unit 314 provides information regarding the mobile object 100 to the management device 400. A control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 determines that the mobile body 100 is a maintenance required mobile body 100A based on the information supplied from the terminal device 300 and the information stored in the mobile body information storage unit 428. It can be determined whether or not.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には表示制御部３３０が備えられ得る。表示制御部３３０は、撮像部３０６によって取得された画像を表示部３１０に表示し得る。図２６は、表示画面の例を示す図である。複数の移動体１００が表示画面３４４に表示されている場合の例が図２６には示されている。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれている場合、表示制御部３３０は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに応じた図形３４２を当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに重畳表示し得る。換言すれば、表示制御部３３０は、当該移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当することを示す図形３４２を、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに重畳表示する。上述したように、管理装置４００は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの当該画像における位置を示す情報を、端末装置３００に供給し得る。このため、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの当該画像における位置を把握し得る。表示制御部３３０は、当該移動体１００が要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに該当することを示す図形３４２を、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに重畳表示し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに応じた図形３４２としては、例えば矢印等が挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。かかる図形３４２は、例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａを囲む丸、楕円等であってもよい。また、かかる図形３４２は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの外形に応じた図形であってもよい。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the display control section 330. The display control unit 330 can display the image acquired by the imaging unit 306 on the display unit 310. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. FIG. 26 shows an example where a plurality of moving objects 100 are displayed on the display screen 344. When the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image, the display control unit 330 can display a graphic 342 corresponding to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A superimposed on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. In other words, the display control unit 330 displays a graphic 342 indicating that the moving object 100 corresponds to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A, superimposed on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. As described above, the management device 400 can supply the terminal device 300 with information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image. Therefore, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 can grasp the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image. The display control unit 330 can display a graphic 342 indicating that the moving body 100 corresponds to the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in a superimposed manner on the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. The graphic 342 corresponding to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A may be, for example, an arrow, but is not limited thereto. The figure 342 may be, for example, a circle, an ellipse, or the like surrounding the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. Further, the graphic 342 may be a graphic corresponding to the external shape of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A.
　管理装置４００は、例えば、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａのうちのメンテナンスの対象となる部位であるメンテナンス対象部位を示す情報を端末装置３００に提供し得る。図２７は、表示画面の例を示す図である。メンテナンス対象部位を示す情報が表示画面３４４に表示されている場合の例が図２７には示されている。端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス対象部位を示す図形３４６を、当該メンテナンス対象部位に重畳表示し得る。メンテナンス対象部位が、例えばバッテリ１０８である場合には、当該バッテリ１０８に当該図形３４６が重畳表示され得るが、これに限定されない。当該バッテリ１０８が装着されている不図示のバッテリホルダに当該図形３４６が重畳表示されてもよい。また、メンテナンス対象部位が、例えば、移動体１００に備えられたライトである場合には、当該ライトに当該図形３４６が重畳表示され得るが、これに限定されない。当該ライトを点灯させるためのスイッチである点灯スイッチに当該図形３４６が重畳表示されてもよい。 For example, the management device 400 can provide the terminal device 300 with information indicating a maintenance target part that is a part to be maintained in the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. FIG. 27 shows an example in which information indicating the maintenance target site is displayed on the display screen 344. The display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 can display a graphic 346 indicating a maintenance target site in a superimposed manner on the maintenance target site. When the maintenance target part is, for example, the battery 108, the graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on the battery 108, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on a battery holder (not shown) to which the battery 108 is attached. Further, when the maintenance target site is, for example, a light provided in the moving body 100, the graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on the light, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The graphic 346 may be displayed superimposed on a lighting switch that is a switch for lighting the light.
　管理装置４００は、例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の内容を示す情報を端末装置３００に供給し得る。端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の内容を示す情報を表示部３１０に表示し得る。例えば、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の内容がバッテリ１０８の充電である場合、表示制御部３３０は、当該メンテナンス作業の内容はバッテリ１０８の充電である旨の情報を表示部３１０に表示し得る。表示制御部３３０は、図２７に示すように、当該メンテナンス作業の内容を示す文字情報３４８を当該メンテナンス対象部位に重畳表示し得る。 For example, the management device 400 can supply the terminal device 300 with information indicating the content of maintenance work for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. The display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 can display information indicating the content of the maintenance work for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A on the display unit 310. For example, when the content of the maintenance work for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A is charging the battery 108, the display control unit 330 displays information to the display unit 310 that the content of the maintenance work is charging the battery 108. can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 27, the display control unit 330 can display text information 348 indicating the content of the maintenance work in a superimposed manner on the maintenance target site.
　端末装置３００には、上述したように、音声情報提供部３２４が備えられ得る。音声情報提供部３２４は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが提供することを要するメンテナンス作業の内容を示す音声情報を提供し得る。音声情報提供部３２４は、当該メンテナンスメンバーが提供することを要するメンテナンス作業の内容を示す音声情報を、端末装置３００に備えられた不図示のスピーカ等を介して提供し得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the audio information providing section 324. The audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information indicating the content of the maintenance work that the maintenance member needs to provide. The audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information indicating the content of the maintenance work that the maintenance member needs to provide via a speaker (not shown) provided in the terminal device 300 or the like.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、作業状態適否判定部４２４が備えられ得る。作業状態適否判定部４２４は、メンテナンス作業の際における作業状態の適否を、端末装置３００から供給される画像に基づいて判定し得る。例えば、端末装置３００から供給される画像が逆光の画像である場合には、当該メンテナンスメンバーはまぶしい状態でメンテナンス作業を行う。まぶしい状態でのメンテナンス作業は不適切である。管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、作業状態適否判定部４２４による判定の結果を示す情報を端末装置３００に供給し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the work state suitability determination unit 424. The work state suitability determination unit 424 can determine the suitability of the work state during maintenance work based on the image supplied from the terminal device 300. For example, if the image supplied from the terminal device 300 is a backlit image, the maintenance member performs maintenance work in a dazzling state. Maintenance work under bright conditions is inappropriate. The control unit 408 included in the management device 400 can supply the terminal device 300 with information indicating the result of the determination by the work state appropriateness determination unit 424.
　作業状態が不適切であることが作業状態適否判定部４２４によって判定された場合、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、作業状態の変更を促すための情報を端末装置３００に供給し得る。端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、管理装置４００から供給される情報に基づいて、作業状態の変更を促すための情報を表示部３１０に表示し得る。表示制御部３３０は、作業状態の変更を促すための図形、文字情報等を表示部３１０に表示し得る。例えば、メンテナンスメンバーの位置姿勢の変更によって適切な作業状態が実現され得る場合、表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンスメンバーの位置姿勢の変更を促すための図形、文字情報等を表示部３１０に表示し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置姿勢の変更によって適切な作業状態が実現され得る場合、表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置姿勢の変更を促すための図形、文字情報等を表示部３１０に表示し得る。 When the work state suitability determination unit 424 determines that the work state is inappropriate, the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 can supply information to prompt the terminal device 300 to change the work state. . The display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 can display information for prompting the user to change the work status on the display unit 310 based on the information supplied from the management device 400. The display control section 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. on the display section 310 to prompt the user to change the working state. For example, if an appropriate working state can be achieved by changing the position and orientation of the maintenance member, the display control unit 330 may display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the maintenance member to change the position and orientation. . If an appropriate working state can be achieved by changing the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A, the display control unit 330 displays graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 for prompting a change in the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. may be displayed.
　端末装置３００には、上述したように、音声情報提供部３２４が備えられ得る。音声情報提供部３２４は、作業状態の変更を促すための音声情報を提供し得る。例えば、メンテナンスメンバーの位置姿勢の変更によって適切な作業状態が実現され得る場合、音声情報提供部３２４は、メンテナンスメンバーの位置姿勢の変更を促すための音声情報を提供し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置姿勢の変更によって適切な作業状態が実現され得る場合、音声情報提供部３２４は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置姿勢の変更を促すための音声情報を提供し得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the audio information providing section 324. The audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information for prompting a change in work status. For example, if an appropriate working state can be achieved by changing the position and orientation of the maintenance member, the audio information providing unit 324 may provide audio information for prompting the maintenance member to change the position and orientation. When an appropriate working state can be achieved by changing the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A, the audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information for prompting the maintenance-requiring mobile body 100A to change its position and orientation.
　表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す情報を、表示部３１０に表示し得る。表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す図形、文字情報等を、保管場所に重畳表示し得る。音声情報提供部３２４は、メンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す音声情報を提供し得る。上述したように、作業情報記憶部４３３には、メンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す情報が記憶されている。管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、例えば、端末装置３００の現在の位置に関する情報と、当該端末装置３００に備えられた画像取得部３２２によって取得される画像と、メンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す情報とに基づいて、当該保管場所が当該画像に含まれているか否かを判定し得る。当該保管場所が当該画像に含まれていると判定した場合、当該制御部４０８は、当該保管場所を示す情報を端末装置３００に提供する。端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、管理装置４００から供給される情報に基づいて、メンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す情報を表示部３１０に表示し得る。 The display control unit 330 can display on the display unit 310 information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. The display control unit 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work superimposed on the storage location. The audio information providing unit 324 may provide audio information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work. As described above, the work information storage unit 433 stores information indicating storage locations of tools used during maintenance work. A control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 stores, for example, information regarding the current position of the terminal device 300, an image acquired by an image acquisition unit 322 provided in the terminal device 300, and information used during maintenance work. Based on the information indicating the storage location of the tool, it can be determined whether the storage location is included in the image. If it is determined that the storage location is included in the image, the control unit 408 provides the terminal device 300 with information indicating the storage location. The display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 can display information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the display unit 310 based on the information supplied from the management device 400.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、位置姿勢適否判定部４２５が備えられ得る。位置姿勢適否判定部４２５は、メンテナンス作業の際における位置姿勢等の適否を判定し得る。位置姿勢適否判定部４２５は、メンテナンス作業の際における位置姿勢の適否を、メンテナンス作業に応じた適切な位置姿勢を示す情報である適切位置姿勢情報と、撮像部３０６によって取得される画像とに基づいて判定し得る。なお、適切位置姿勢情報は、上述したように、作業情報記憶部４３３に記憶されている。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the position/orientation suitability determination unit 425. The position/posture suitability determination unit 425 can determine suitability of position/posture, etc. during maintenance work. The position/posture suitability determination unit 425 determines suitability of the position/posture during maintenance work based on appropriate position/posture information, which is information indicating an appropriate position/posture according to the maintenance work, and an image acquired by the imaging unit 306. It can be determined by Note that the appropriate position and orientation information is stored in the work information storage unit 433, as described above.
　位置姿勢が不適切であることが位置姿勢適否判定部４２５によって判定された場合、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、位置姿勢の変更を促すための情報を端末装置３００に供給し得る。端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、管理装置４００から供給される情報に基づいて、位置姿勢の変更を促すための情報を表示部３１０に表示し得る。表示制御部３３０は、位置姿勢の変更を促すための図形、文字情報等を表示部３１０に表示し得る。例えば、メンテナンスメンバーの位置姿勢が不適切な場合、表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンスメンバーの位置姿勢の変更を促すための図形、文字情報等を表示部３１０に表示し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置姿勢が不適切な場合、表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの位置姿勢の変更を促すための図形、文字情報等を表示部３１０に表示し得る。部品の位置姿勢が不適切な場合、表示制御部３３０は、部品の位置姿勢の変更を促すための図形、文字情報等を表示部３１０に表示し得る。音声情報提供部３２４は、これらの位置姿勢の変更を促すための音声情報を提供し得る。 If the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 determines that the position/posture is inappropriate, the control unit 408 included in the management device 400 may supply the terminal device 300 with information for prompting a change in the position/posture. . A display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 can display information for prompting a change in position and orientation on the display unit 310 based on information supplied from the management device 400. The display control unit 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the user to change the position and orientation. For example, when the position and orientation of the maintenance member is inappropriate, the display control unit 330 may display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the maintenance member to change the position and orientation. When the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A is inappropriate, the display control unit 330 can display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 for prompting a change in the position and orientation of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A. If the position and orientation of the component is inappropriate, the display control unit 330 may display graphics, text information, etc. on the display unit 310 to prompt the user to change the position and orientation of the component. The audio information providing unit 324 can provide audio information for prompting changes in these positions and orientations.
　図２８は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１６１において、端末装置３００に備えられた撮像部３０６によって取得される画像を、端末装置３００に備えられた画像取得部３２２が取得する。この後、ステップＳ１６２に遷移する。 In step S161, the image acquisition unit 322 included in the terminal device 300 acquires an image acquired by the imaging unit 306 included in the terminal device 300. After this, the process moves to step S162.
　ステップＳ１６２において、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、画像取得部３２２によって取得された画像を管理装置４００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ１６３に遷移する。 In step S162, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 provides the management device 400 with the image acquired by the image acquisition unit 322. After this, the process moves to step S163.
　ステップＳ１６３において、管理装置４００に備えられた移動体判定部４１７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれているか否かを判定する。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれている場合（ステップＳ１６３においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ１６４に遷移する。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａが当該画像に含まれていない場合（ステップＳ１６３においてＮＯ）、図２８に示す処理が完了する。 In step S163, the moving object determination unit 417 included in the management device 400 determines whether the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A is included in the image. If the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A is included in the image (YES in step S163), the process moves to step S164. If the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A is not included in the image (NO in step S163), the process shown in FIG. 28 is completed.
　ステップＳ１６４において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａの当該画像における位置を示す情報を、端末装置３００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ１６５に遷移する。 In step S164, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information indicating the position of the maintenance-requiring moving body 100A in the image. After this, the process moves to step S165.
　ステップＳ１６５において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、当該画像を表示部３１０に表示するとともに、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに応じた図形を当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに重畳表示する。こうして、図２８に示す処理が完了する。 In step S165, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays the image on the display unit 310, and displays a graphic corresponding to the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A in a superimposed manner on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 28 is completed.
　図２９は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１７１において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａのうちのメンテナンス対象部位を示す情報を、端末装置３００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ１７２に遷移する。 In step S171, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 provides the terminal device 300 with information indicating the maintenance target portion of the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S172.
　ステップＳ１７２において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス対象部位を含む要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａを表示部３１０に表示するとともに、メンテナンス対象部位であることを示す図形を当該メンテナンス対象部位に重畳表示する。こうして、図２９に示す処理が完了する。 In step S172, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays the maintenance required moving object 100A including the maintenance target part on the display unit 310, and also displays a graphic indicating that the maintenance target part is the maintenance target part. superimposed on the image. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 29 is completed.
　図３０は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１８１において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の内容を示す情報を端末装置３００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ１８２に遷移する。 In step S181, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information indicating the content of the maintenance work for the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S182.
　ステップＳ１８２において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、メンテナンス対象部位を含む要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａを表示部３１０に表示するとともに、当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の内容を示す情報を当該メンテナンス対象部位に重畳表示する。こうして、図３０に示す処理が完了する。 In step S182, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays the maintenance required moving body 100A including the maintenance target portion on the display unit 310, and the content of the maintenance work for the maintenance required moving body 100A. Information indicating the maintenance target area is displayed superimposed on the maintenance target area. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 30 is completed.
　図３１は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ１９１において、管理装置４００に備えられた作業状態適否判定部４２４は、メンテナンス作業の際における作業状態の適否を判定する。作業状態が不適切であることが作業状態適否判定部４２４によって判定された場合（ステップＳ１９１においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ１９２に遷移する。作業状態が適切であることが作業状態適否判定部４２４によって判定された場合（ステップＳ１９１においてＮＯ）、図３１に示す処理が完了する。 In step S191, the work state suitability determination unit 424 provided in the management device 400 determines the suitability of the work state during maintenance work. If the work state suitability determination unit 424 determines that the work state is inappropriate (YES in step S191), the process moves to step S192. When the work state suitability determination unit 424 determines that the work state is appropriate (NO in step S191), the process shown in FIG. 31 is completed.
　ステップＳ１９２において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、作業状態の変更を促すための情報を端末装置３００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ１９３に遷移する。 In step S192, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information for prompting a change in the work status. After this, the process moves to step S193.
　ステップＳ１９３において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、作業状態の変更を促すための情報を表示部３１０に表示する。こうして、図３１に示す処理が完了する。 In step S193, the display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 displays information for prompting the user to change the working state on the display unit 310. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 31 is completed.
　図３２は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２０１において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す情報を端末装置３００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ２０２に遷移する。 In step S201, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 provides the terminal device 300 with information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S202.
　ステップＳ２０２において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業の際に用いられる道具の保管場所を示す情報を、表示部３１０に重畳表示する。こうして、図３２に示す処理が完了する。 In step S202, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 superimposes and displays on the display unit 310 information indicating the storage location of tools used during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 32 is completed.
　図３３は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２１１において、管理装置４００に備えられた位置姿勢適否判定部４２５は、メンテナンス作業の際における位置姿勢の適否を判定する。位置姿勢が不適切であることが位置姿勢適否判定部４２５によって判定された場合（ステップＳ２１１においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２１２に遷移する。位置姿勢が適切であることが位置姿勢適否判定部４２５によって判定された場合（ステップＳ２１１においてＮＯ）、図３３に示す処理が完了する。 In step S211, the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 provided in the management device 400 determines the suitability of the position/posture during maintenance work. If the position and orientation suitability determination unit 425 determines that the position and orientation are inappropriate (YES in step S211), the process moves to step S212. When the position and orientation suitability determination unit 425 determines that the position and orientation are appropriate (NO in step S211), the process shown in FIG. 33 is completed.
　ステップＳ２１２において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、位置姿勢の変更を促すための情報を端末装置３００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ２１３に遷移する。 In step S212, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 supplies the terminal device 300 with information for prompting the change of position and orientation. After this, the process moves to step S213.
　ステップＳ２１３において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、位置姿勢の変更を促すための情報を表示部３１０に表示する。こうして、図３３に示す処理が完了する。 In step S213, the display control unit 330 included in the terminal device 300 displays information on the display unit 310 to prompt the user to change the position and orientation. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 33 is completed.
　図３４は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。 FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、設定部４４０が備えられ得る。設定部４４０は、管理区域３５０を設定し得る。管理区域３５０は、移動体１００に対するメンテナンスを提供するための管理が行われる区域である。設定部４４０は、複数の管理区域３５０を設定し得るが、ここでは、複数の管理区域３５０のうちの１つの管理区域３５０を例に説明する。設定部４４０は、地図情報に基づいて管理区域３５０を設定し得る。地図情報は、地図情報記憶部４３８に予め記憶され得る。地図情報によって示される不図示の区域のうちの一部が管理区域３５０として設定され得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the setting section 440. The setting unit 440 can set the management area 350. The management area 350 is an area where management for providing maintenance to the mobile object 100 is performed. Although the setting unit 440 can set a plurality of management areas 350, one management area 350 among the plurality of management areas 350 will be explained here as an example. The setting unit 440 can set the management area 350 based on map information. The map information may be stored in the map information storage unit 438 in advance. A part of the area (not shown) indicated by the map information may be set as the management area 350.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、決定部４４２が備えられ得る。決定部４４２は、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。サービス拠点３５２は、移動体１００に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点である。決定部４４２は、管理区域３５０内に略均等にサービス拠点３５２が配置されるように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。即ち、決定部４４２は、サービス拠点３５２間の距離が互いに略均等になるように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。換言すれば、決定部４４２は、最寄りのサービス拠点３５２までのアクセス時間の最大値が予め決められた最大アクセス時間以下となるように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。例えば、予め決められた最大アクセス時間が例えば１０分である場合には、管理区域３５０内のいずれの位置にユーザが位置している場合であっても、最寄りのサービス拠点３５２までの当該ユーザのアクセス時間が１０分以下となるように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定する。アクセス時間は、地図情報に基づいて算出され得るが、これに限定されない。アクセス時間に関する情報が、地図情報に紐付けられていてもよい。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the determination unit 442. The determining unit 442 may determine the location of the service location 352. The service base 352 is a base that provides maintenance work for the mobile object 100. The determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the service bases 352 are approximately evenly distributed within the management area 350. That is, the determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the distances between the service bases 352 are approximately equal. In other words, the determining unit 442 can determine the location of the service base 352 such that the maximum value of the access time to the nearest service base 352 is equal to or less than the predetermined maximum access time. For example, if the predetermined maximum access time is 10 minutes, no matter where the user is located within the managed area 350, the user's access time to the nearest service base 352 is The location of the service base 352 is determined so that the access time is 10 minutes or less. The access time can be calculated based on map information, but is not limited thereto. Information regarding access time may be linked to map information.
　決定部４４２は、管理区域３５０におけるメンテナンス需要に基づいて、当該管理区域３５０内におけるサービス拠点３５２の数を決定し得る。メンテナンス需要に関する情報は、予め記憶部４０４に記憶され得る。メンテナンス需要に関する情報が、地図情報に予め紐付けられていてもよい。当該管理区域３５０におけるメンテナンス需要が比較的大きい場合には、決定部４４２は、当該管理区域３５０内におけるサービス拠点３５２の数を比較的小さく設定し得る。当該管理区域３５０におけるメンテナンス需要が中程度である場合には、決定部４４２は、当該管理区域３５０内におけるサービス拠点３５２の数を中程度に設定し得る。当該管理区域３５０におけるメンテナンス需要が比較的小さい場合には、決定部４４２は、当該管理区域３５０内におけるサービス拠点３５２の数を比較的小さく設定し得る。 The determining unit 442 can determine the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 based on the maintenance demand in the management area 350. Information regarding maintenance demand may be stored in storage unit 404 in advance. Information regarding maintenance demand may be linked to map information in advance. When the maintenance demand in the management area 350 is relatively large, the determining unit 442 can set the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 to be relatively small. When the maintenance demand in the management area 350 is medium, the determining unit 442 can set the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 to be medium. When the maintenance demand in the management area 350 is relatively small, the determining unit 442 can set the number of service bases 352 in the management area 350 to be relatively small.
　図３５は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。 FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
　決定部４４２は、サービス拠点３５２の対応可能業務に基づいて、各々のサービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。例えば、決定部４４２は、高度サービス拠点３５２Ａと、非高度サービス拠点３５２Ｂとを、適切に配置し得る。高度サービス拠点３５２Ａは、様々な業務に対応可能なサービス拠点である。非高度サービス拠点３５２Ｂは、一部の業務にのみ対応可能なサービス拠点である。上述したように、管理装置４００に備えられたメンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２には、メンテナンスメンバー情報が記憶されている。メンテナンスメンバー情報には、メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業に関する情報である対応可能作業情報が含まれ得る。サービス拠点３５２に属するメンテナンスメンバーに関するメンテナンスメンバー情報に基づいて、サービス拠点３５２の対応可能業務が把握され得る。 The determining unit 442 can determine the location of each service base 352 based on the services that the service base 352 can handle. For example, the determining unit 442 may appropriately arrange the advanced service base 352A and the non-sophisticated service base 352B. The advanced service base 352A is a service base that can handle various tasks. The non-advanced service base 352B is a service base that can only handle some tasks. As described above, maintenance member information is stored in the maintenance member information storage unit 432 provided in the management device 400. The maintenance member information may include available work information that is information regarding maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. Based on maintenance member information regarding maintenance members belonging to the service base 352, the services that the service base 352 can handle can be grasped.
　決定部４４２は、非高度サービス拠点３５２Ｂ同士が互いに隣接しないように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。即ち、決定部４４２は、一の非高度サービス拠点３５２Ｂと他の非高度サービス拠点３５２Ｂとの間に高度サービス拠点３５２Ａを配置し得る。非高度サービス拠点３５２Ｂ同士が互いに隣接するのを防止し得るため、高度サービス拠点３５２Ａまでのアクセス時間の短縮に寄与し得る。 The determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the non-advanced service bases 352B are not adjacent to each other. That is, the determining unit 442 can arrange the advanced service base 352A between one non-sophisticated service base 352B and another non-sophisticated service base 352B. Since the non-advanced service bases 352B can be prevented from being adjacent to each other, it can contribute to shortening the access time to the advanced service base 352A.
　図３６は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。 FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
　決定部４４２は、サービス拠点の稼働時間に基づいて、各々のサービス拠点の位置を決定し得る。例えば、決定部４４２は、長時間サービス拠点３５２Ｃと、短時間サービス拠点３５２Ｄとを、適切に配置し得る。長時間サービス拠点３５２Ｃは、稼働時間が比較的長いサービス拠点である。短時間サービス拠点３５２Ｄは、稼働時間が比較的短いサービス拠点である。上述したように、管理装置４００に備えられたメンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２には、メンテナンスメンバー情報が記憶されている。メンテナンスメンバー情報には、メンテナンスメンバーの稼働時間に関する情報が含まれ得る。サービス拠点３５２に属するメンテナンスメンバーに関するメンテナンスメンバー情報に基づいて、サービス拠点３５２の稼働時間が把握され得る。 The determining unit 442 can determine the location of each service location based on the operating hours of the service location. For example, the determining unit 442 can appropriately arrange the long-time service base 352C and the short-time service base 352D. The long-time service base 352C is a service base with a relatively long operating time. The short-time service base 352D is a service base whose operating time is relatively short. As described above, maintenance member information is stored in the maintenance member information storage unit 432 provided in the management device 400. The maintenance member information may include information regarding the maintenance member's operating hours. Based on maintenance member information regarding maintenance members belonging to the service base 352, the operating hours of the service base 352 can be grasped.
　決定部４４２は、短時間サービス拠点３５２Ｄ同士が互いに隣接しないように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。即ち、決定部４４２は、一の短時間サービス拠点３５２Ｄと他の短時間サービス拠点３５２Ｄとの間に長時間サービス拠点３５２Ｃを配置し得る。短時間サービス拠点３５２Ｄ同士が互いに隣接するのを防止し得るため、利便性の向上に資する。 The determining unit 442 can determine the positions of the service bases 352 so that the short-time service bases 352D are not adjacent to each other. That is, the determining unit 442 can arrange the long-time service base 352C between one short-time service base 352D and another short-time service base 352D. Since it is possible to prevent the short-time service bases 352D from being adjacent to each other, it contributes to improving convenience.
　図３７は、サービス拠点の配置の例を示す図である。 FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of service bases.
　決定部４４２は、管理区域３５０のうちの標高が相対的に低い箇所である低標高箇所３５０Ｌにサービス拠点３５２が少なくとも配置されるように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定し得る。地図情報には、各箇所の標高に関する情報が含まれ得る。決定部４４２は、管理区域３５０のうちの低標高箇所３５０Ｌを地図情報に基づいて把握し得る。決定部４４２は、少なくとも低標高箇所３５０Ｌにサービス拠点３５２を配置する。標高が相対的に低い箇所には、人が集まりやすい傾向がある。このため、標高が相対的に低い箇所においては、メンテナンス需要が比較的高い。また、不具合が生じている移動体１００を、標高が相対的に低い箇所から標高が相対的に高い箇所に向かってユーザが徒歩で移動させることは、容易ではない。一方、不具合が生じている移動体１００を、標高が相対的に高い箇所から標高が相対的に低い箇所に移動させることは、比較的容易である。このような理由により、管理区域３５０のうちの低標高箇所３５０Ｌにサービス拠点３５２が少なくとも配置され得る。 The determining unit 442 can determine the location of the service base 352 so that the service base 352 is located at least in a low-altitude area 350L, which is a relatively low altitude location in the management area 350. The map information may include information regarding the elevation of each location. The determining unit 442 can grasp the low-elevation locations 350L in the management area 350 based on map information. The determining unit 442 arranges the service base 352 at least at a low altitude location 350L. People tend to gather in areas with relatively low altitudes. For this reason, maintenance demand is relatively high in locations with relatively low altitudes. Further, it is not easy for the user to move the mobile object 100 in which the problem has occurred on foot from a place with a relatively low altitude to a place with a relatively high altitude. On the other hand, it is relatively easy to move the mobile object 100 in which the problem has occurred from a location with a relatively high altitude to a location with a relatively low altitude. For this reason, the service base 352 may be located at least at the low altitude location 350L of the management area 350.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、是正部４４４が備えられ得る。サービス拠点３５２の稼働に偏りが生ずる場合がある。即ち、各サービス拠点３５２における来客数の偏りが生ずる場合がある。来客数が比較的多いサービス拠点３５２においては、メンテナンスの完了に至るまでの時間が比較的長くなる傾向がある。一方、来客数が比較的少ないサービス拠点３５２においては、メンテナンスの完了に至るまでの時間が比較的短くなる傾向がある。稼働の偏り、即ち、来客数の偏りを是正すれば、メンテナンスの完了に至るまでの時間を全体として平準化し得る。そこで、本実施形態では、是正部４４４は、サービス拠点３５２の稼働に偏りが生じた場合に、送客のための情報を携帯端末２００に配信する。携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６は、送客のための情報を携帯端末２００に備えられた表示部２１０に表示し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the correction unit 444. The operation of the service bases 352 may be uneven. That is, the number of customers at each service base 352 may be uneven. At the service base 352 where the number of visitors is relatively large, it tends to take a relatively long time to complete maintenance. On the other hand, at the service base 352 where the number of visitors is relatively small, the time required to complete maintenance tends to be relatively short. By correcting the imbalance in operation, that is, the imbalance in the number of visitors, it is possible to equalize the time it takes to complete maintenance as a whole. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the correction unit 444 distributes information for customer referral to the mobile terminal 200 when the operation of the service base 352 is uneven. The display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can display information for customer referral on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200.
　送客のための情報としては、例えば、来客数が比較的少ないサービス拠点３５２の利用を当該ユーザに促すための情報等が挙げられ得る。是正部４４４は、ユーザが所持している携帯端末２００の位置から所定距離内に位置する複数のサービス拠点３５２のうちから、来客数が比較的少ないサービス拠点３５２を抽出し得る。是正部４４４は、こうして抽出したサービス拠点３５２を示す情報を、携帯端末２００に配信し得る。 Information for sending customers may include, for example, information for encouraging the user to use the service base 352 where the number of customers is relatively small. The correction unit 444 can extract a service base 352 with a relatively small number of visitors from among the plurality of service bases 352 located within a predetermined distance from the location of the mobile terminal 200 owned by the user. The correction unit 444 can deliver information indicating the service base 352 extracted in this way to the mobile terminal 200.
　送客のための情報は、各サービス拠点３５２における来客数を示す情報であってもよい。是正部４４４は、各サービス拠点３５２における来客数を示す情報を、携帯端末２００に配信してもよい。携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６は、各サービス拠点３５２における来客数を示す情報を、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示部２１０に表示し得る。来客数が比較的少ないサービス拠点３５２が、当該情報に基づいてユーザによって把握され得る。来客数が比較的少ないサービス拠点３５２の利用が、当該情報によって促され得る。 The information for sending customers may be information indicating the number of customers at each service base 352. The correction unit 444 may deliver information indicating the number of visitors at each service base 352 to the mobile terminal 200. The display control unit 226 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can display information indicating the number of visitors at each service base 352 on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200. Based on this information, the user can know which service bases 352 have a relatively small number of visitors. The information can encourage the use of the service base 352 where the number of visitors is relatively small.
　図３８は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２２１において、管理装置４００に備えられた設定部４４０は、管理区域３５０を設定する。この後、ステップＳ２２２に遷移する。 In step S221, the setting unit 440 provided in the management device 400 sets the management area 350. After this, the process moves to step S222.
　ステップＳ２２２において、管理装置４００に備えられた決定部４４２は、移動体１００に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点３５２が、管理区域３５０内に略均等に配置されるように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定する。こうして、図３８に示す処理が完了する。 In step S222, the determining unit 442 provided in the management device 400 determines that the service bases 352, which are bases that provide maintenance work for the mobile object 100, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area 350. The location of the service base 352 is determined. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 38 is completed.
　図３９は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２３１において、管理装置４００に備えられた設定部４４０は、管理区域３５０を設定する。この後、ステップＳ２３２に遷移する。 In step S231, the setting unit 440 provided in the management device 400 sets the management area 350. After this, the process moves to step S232.
　ステップＳ２３２において、管理装置４００に備えられた決定部４４２は、メンテナンス需要に基づいてサービス拠点３５２の数を決定する。この後、ステップＳ２３３に遷移する。 In step S232, the determining unit 442 provided in the management device 400 determines the number of service locations 352 based on maintenance demand. After this, the process moves to step S233.
　ステップＳ２３３において、管理装置４００に備えられた決定部４４２は、移動体１００に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点３５２が、管理区域３５０内に略均等に配置されるように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定する。こうして、図３９に示す処理が完了する。 In step S233, the determining unit 442 provided in the management device 400 determines that the service bases 352, which are bases that provide maintenance work for the mobile object 100, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area 350. The location of the service base 352 is determined. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 39 is completed.
　図４０は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２４１において、管理装置４００に備えられた設定部４４０は、管理区域３５０を設定する。この後、ステップＳ２４２に遷移する。 In step S241, the setting unit 440 provided in the management device 400 sets the management area 350. After this, the process moves to step S242.
　ステップＳ２４２において、管理装置４００に備えられた決定部４４２は、当該管理区域３５０のうちの低標高箇所３５０Ｌを地図情報に基づいて把握する。この後、ステップＳ２４３に遷移する。 In step S242, the determining unit 442 included in the management device 400 determines the low-elevation location 350L in the management area 350 based on the map information. After this, the process moves to step S243.
　ステップＳ２４３において、決定部４４２は、少なくとも低標高箇所３５０Ｌにサービス拠点３５２が位置するように、サービス拠点３５２の位置を決定する。こうして、図４０に示す処理が完了する。 In step S243, the determining unit 442 determines the position of the service base 352 so that the service base 352 is located at least at the low altitude location 350L. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 40 is completed.
　図４１は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２５１において、管理装置４００に備えられた是正部４４４は、予め決められた偏在閾値以上の偏りがサービス拠点３５２間で生じているか否かを判定する。予め決められた偏在閾値以上の偏りがサービス拠点３５２間で生じている場合には（ステップＳ２５１においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２５２に遷移する。予め決められた偏在閾値以上の偏りがサービス拠点３５２間で生じていない場合には（ステップＳ２５１においてＮＯ）、図４１に示す処理が完了する。 In step S251, the correction unit 444 provided in the management device 400 determines whether or not a bias greater than or equal to a predetermined maldistribution threshold has occurred between the service locations 352. If a bias equal to or greater than a predetermined maldistribution threshold occurs between service locations 352 (YES in step S251), the process moves to step S252. If a bias equal to or greater than a predetermined maldistribution threshold does not occur among the service locations 352 (NO in step S251), the process shown in FIG. 41 is completed.
　ステップＳ２５２において、是正部４４４は、送客のための情報を携帯端末２００に配信する。こうして、図４１に示す処理が完了する。 In step S252, the correction unit 444 delivers information for customer referral to the mobile terminal 200. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 41 is completed.
　携帯端末２００と端末装置３００とは、基地局２３（図１参照）が介在しない無線通信である非基地局介在無線通信が可能である。 The mobile terminal 200 and the terminal device 300 are capable of non-base station mediated wireless communication, which is wireless communication without the intervening base station 23 (see FIG. 1).
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、受付部２１６が備えられ得る。受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付け得る。要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力は、携帯端末２００の所持者によって行われ得る。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the reception section 216. The reception unit 216 can receive input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A. The maintenance required mobile object information may be input by the owner of the mobile terminal 200.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２が備えられ得る。要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２は、受付部２１６によって受け付けられた要メンテナンス移動体情報に基づいて、以下のような処理を行い得る。即ち、要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報を、非基地局介在無線通信によって端末装置３００に提供し得る。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the maintenance required information providing unit 222. The maintenance-required information providing unit 222 can perform the following processing based on the maintenance-required mobile object information received by the reception unit 216. That is, the maintenance required information providing unit 222 can provide the terminal device 300 with maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A through non-base station mediated wireless communication.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、表示制御部３３０が備えられ得る。表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス情報に応じた表示情報を端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示し得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the display control section 330. The display control unit 330 can display display information according to the required maintenance information on the display unit 310 provided in the terminal device 300.
　携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報の入力を更に受け付け得る。携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２は、不具合内容情報を、非基地局介在無線通信によって端末装置３００に提供し得る。 The receiving unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can further receive input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. The maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can provide the malfunction content information to the terminal device 300 by non-base station mediated wireless communication.
　端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、不具合内容情報と、メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報とに更に基づいて、要メンテナンス情報に応じた表示情報を端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示し得る。 The display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information corresponding to the maintenance required information on the terminal device 300 based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. It can be displayed on a display section 310 provided in the.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、判定部２２７が備えられ得る。判定部２２７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を携帯端末２００の所持者が行い得るか否かを、当該所持者が対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す情報と、不具合内容情報とに基づいて判定し得る。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may include the determination unit 227. The determination unit 227 determines whether or not the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is capable of performing maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, based on information indicating maintenance work that the owner can perform and defect content information. It can be determined based on
　携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を所持者が行い得ると判定部２２７が判定した場合、以下のような処理を行い得る。表示制御部２２６は、かかる場合、メンテナンス作業を当該携帯端末２００の所持者に委託するための要メンテナンス情報を、当該携帯端末２００に備えられた表示部２１０に表示し得る。 The display control unit 226 included in the mobile terminal 200 can perform the following processing when the determination unit 227 determines that the owner can perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. In such a case, the display control unit 226 can display the required maintenance information for entrusting the maintenance work to the owner of the mobile terminal 200 on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200.
　携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２は、メンテナンス作業に対しての受託を携帯端末２００の所持者が拒否した場合に、要メンテナンス情報を端末装置３００に提供し得る。 The maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can provide maintenance required information to the terminal device 300 when the owner of the mobile terminal 200 refuses to accept maintenance work.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、インセンティブ付与部４４５が備えられ得る。インセンティブ付与部４４５は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンスが携帯端末２００の所持者によって行われた場合に、メンテナンス作業を行った当該所持者に対してインセンティブを付与し得る。インセンティブとしては、例えばポイントが挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。かかるポイントは、当該所持者が移動体１００を借り受ける際の費用に充当され得るが、これに限定されない。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the incentive giving unit 445. When the owner of the mobile terminal 200 performs maintenance on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, the incentive granting unit 445 can provide an incentive to the owner who performed the maintenance work. Examples of incentives include, but are not limited to, points. These points can be used for expenses when the owner rents the mobile object 100, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、入力受付部３１７が備えられ得る。入力受付部３１７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付け得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the input reception section 317. The input receiving unit 317 can receive input of maintenance required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance required mobile object 100A.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、提供部３２６が備えられ得る。提供部３２６は、入力受付部３１７によって受け付けられた要メンテナンス移動体情報に基づいて、非基地局介在無線通信により不図示の他の端末装置に要メンテナンス情報を提供し得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the providing unit 326. The providing unit 326 can provide the maintenance required information to another terminal device (not shown) through non-base station mediated wireless communication based on the maintenance required mobile object information received by the input receiving unit 317.
　端末装置３００に備えられた入力受付部３１７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報の入力を受け付け得る。 The input receiving unit 317 provided in the terminal device 300 can receive input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、可否判定部３３１が備えられ得る。可否判定部３３１は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者が行い得るか否かを、当該所持者が対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す情報と、不具合内容情報とに基づいて判定し得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the availability determination unit 331. The availability determination unit 331 determines whether or not the owner of the terminal device 300 can perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A, based on information indicating the maintenance work that the owner can handle and defect content information. The determination can be made based on the following.
　端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者が行い得ると可否判定部３３１が判定した場合、以下のような処理を行い得る。即ち、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、かかる場合、メンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者に依頼するためのメンテナンス依頼情報を、当該端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示し得る。 When the availability determining unit 331 determines that the owner of the terminal device 300 can perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 performs the following processing. can be done. That is, in such a case, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 transmits maintenance request information for requesting the owner of the terminal device 300 to perform maintenance work to the display unit 310 provided in the terminal device 300. can be displayed.
　管理装置４００に備えられたインセンティブ付与部４４５は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報の提供に対してインセンティブを付与し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報の提供が携帯端末２００を用いて行われた場合には、当該携帯端末２００の所持者に対してインセンティブが付与され得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報の提供が端末装置３００を用いて行われた場合には、当該端末装置３００の所持者に対してインセンティブが付与され得る。インセンティブとしては、例えばポイントが挙げられ得るが、これに限定されない。 The incentive giving unit 445 provided in the management device 400 can give an incentive for providing information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. When information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A is provided using the mobile terminal 200, an incentive may be given to the owner of the mobile terminal 200. When the information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A is provided using the terminal device 300, an incentive can be given to the owner of the terminal device 300. Examples of incentives include, but are not limited to, points.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、情報提供者評価部４５６が備えられ得る。情報提供者評価部４５６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報の提供を行った者である情報提供者に対する評価を示す情報である情報提供者評価情報を行い得る。例えば、当該情報提供者によって提供される情報の精度が比較的低い場合には、情報提供者評価部４５６は、当該情報提供者に対する評価を比較的低く設定し得る。当該情報提供者によって提供される情報の精度が比較的高い場合には、情報提供者評価部４５６は、当該情報提供者に対する評価を比較的高く設定し得る。インセンティブ付与部４４５は、情報提供者評価情報における当該情報提供者の評価に高さに応じてインセンティブの大きさを設定してもよい。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the information provider evaluation unit 456. The information provider evaluation unit 456 can provide information provider evaluation information that is information indicating an evaluation of the information provider who provided information regarding the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. For example, if the accuracy of the information provided by the information provider is relatively low, the information provider evaluation unit 456 may set the evaluation of the information provider relatively low. When the accuracy of the information provided by the information provider is relatively high, the information provider evaluation unit 456 can set the evaluation of the information provider relatively high. The incentive giving unit 445 may set the magnitude of the incentive according to the evaluation of the information provider in the information provider evaluation information.
　図４２は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２６１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付け得る。上述したように、要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力は、携帯端末２００の所持者によって行われ得る。この後、ステップＳ２６２に遷移する。 In step S261, the receiving unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can receive input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. As described above, the maintenance required mobile object information may be input by the owner of the mobile terminal 200. After this, the process moves to step S262.
　ステップＳ２６２において、携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報を、非基地局介在無線通信により端末装置３００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ２６３に遷移する。 In step S262, the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides the terminal device 300 with maintenance required information for entrusting maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A through non-base station mediated wireless communication. . After this, the process moves to step S263.
　ステップＳ２６３において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス情報に応じた表示情報を端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示する。こうして、図４２に示す処理が完了する。 In step S263, the display control section 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information corresponding to the maintenance required information on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 42 is completed.
　図４３は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２７１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ２７２に遷移する。 In step S271, the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S272.
　ステップＳ２７２において、受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報の入力を更に受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ２７３に遷移する。 In step S272, the receiving unit 216 further receives input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S273.
　ステップＳ２７３において、携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報と、不具合内容情報とを、非基地局介在無線通信により端末装置３００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ２７４に遷移する。 In step S273, the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 transmits the maintenance required information for entrusting the maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A and the defect content information by non-base station mediated wireless communication. The information is provided to the terminal device 300. After this, the process moves to step S274.
　ステップＳ２７４において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、不具合内容情報と、メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報とに更に基づいて、要メンテナンス情報に応じた表示情報を端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示する。 In step S274, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information according to the maintenance required information based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that can be performed by the maintenance member. is displayed on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300.
　図４４は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２８１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ２８２に遷移する。 In step S281, the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S282.
　ステップＳ２８２において、受付部２１６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報の入力を更に受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ２８３に遷移する。 In step S282, the receiving unit 216 further receives input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S283.
　ステップＳ２８３において、携帯端末２００に備えられた判定部２２７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該携帯端末２００の所持者が行い得るか否かを判定する。判定部２２７は、当該メンテナンス作業を当該携帯端末２００の所持者が行い得るか否かを、当該所持者が対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す情報と、不具合内容情報とに基づいて判定し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該携帯端末２００の所持者が行い得る場合（ステップＳ２８３においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２８４に遷移する。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該携帯端末２００の所持者が行い得ない場合（ステップＳ２８３においてＮＯ）、ステップＳ２８５に遷移する。 In step S283, the determination unit 227 provided in the mobile terminal 200 determines whether the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. The determination unit 227 can determine whether or not the owner of the mobile terminal 200 can perform the maintenance work based on the information indicating the maintenance work that the owner can handle and the defect content information. If the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (YES in step S283), the process moves to step S284. If the owner of the mobile terminal 200 is unable to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (NO in step S283), the process moves to step S285.
　ステップＳ２８４において、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示制御部２２６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を当該携帯端末２００の所持者に委託するための要メンテナンス情報を、当該携帯端末２００に備えられた表示部２１０に表示する。 In step S284, the display control unit 226 included in the mobile terminal 200 displays required maintenance information for entrusting the owner of the mobile terminal 200 with maintenance work on the maintenance required mobile object 100A. displayed on the display section 210.
　ステップＳ２８５において、携帯端末２００に備えられた制御部２１４は、メンテナンス作業に対しての受託が携帯端末２００の所持者によって拒否されたか否かを判定する。メンテナンス作業に対しての受託の拒否は、表示部２１０に表示される操作画面が携帯端末２００の所持者によって操作されることによって行われ得る。メンテナンス作業に対しての受託が携帯端末２００の所持者によって拒否されなかった場合（ステップＳ２８５においてＮＯ）には、図４４に示す処理が完了する。メンテナンス作業に対しての受託が携帯端末２００の所持者によって拒否された場合（ステップＳ２８５においてＹＥＳ）には、ステップＳ２８６に遷移する。 In step S285, the control unit 214 provided in the mobile terminal 200 determines whether or not the request for maintenance work has been rejected by the owner of the mobile terminal 200. Rejection of maintenance work may be performed by the owner of the mobile terminal 200 operating the operation screen displayed on the display unit 210. If the request for maintenance work is not rejected by the owner of the mobile terminal 200 (NO in step S285), the process shown in FIG. 44 is completed. If the owner of the mobile terminal 200 refuses to undertake maintenance work (YES in step S285), the process moves to step S286.
　ステップＳ２８６において、携帯端末２００に備えられた要メンテナンス情報提供部２２２は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報と、不具合内容情報とを、非基地局介在無線通信により端末装置３００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ２８７に遷移する。 In step S286, the maintenance required information providing unit 222 provided in the mobile terminal 200 transmits the maintenance required information for entrusting the maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A and the defect content information by non-base station mediated wireless communication. The information is provided to the terminal device 300. After this, the process moves to step S287.
　ステップＳ２８７において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、不具合内容情報と、メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報とに更に基づいて、要メンテナンス情報に応じた表示情報を端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示する。こうして、図４４に示す処理が完了する。 In step S287, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays display information according to the maintenance required information based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that can be performed by the maintenance member. is displayed on the display section 310 provided in the terminal device 300. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 44 is completed.
　図４５は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ２９１において、端末装置３００に備えられた入力受付部３１７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに関する情報である要メンテナンス移動体情報の入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ２９２に遷移する。 In step S291, the input receiving unit 317 provided in the terminal device 300 receives input of maintenance-required mobile object information, which is information regarding the maintenance-required mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S292.
　ステップＳ２９２において、入力受付部３１７は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報の入力を更に受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ２９３に遷移する。 In step S292, the input receiving unit 317 further receives input of defect content information indicating the details of the defect occurring in the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. After this, the process moves to step S293.
　ステップＳ２９３において、端末装置３００に備えられた可否判定部３３１は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者が行い得るか否かを判定する。可否判定部３３１は、当該メンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者が行い得るか否かを、当該所持者が対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す情報と、不具合内容情報とに基づいて判定し得る。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者が行い得る場合（ステップＳ２９３においてＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２９４に遷移する。要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者が行い得ない場合（ステップＳ２９３においてＮＯ）、ステップＳ２９５に遷移する。 In step S293, the availability determining unit 331 provided in the terminal device 300 determines whether the owner of the terminal device 300 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. The availability determination unit 331 can determine whether or not the owner of the terminal device 300 can perform the maintenance work based on the information indicating the maintenance work that the owner can perform and the defect content information. If the owner of the terminal device 300 is able to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (YES in step S293), the process moves to step S294. If the owner of the terminal device 300 is unable to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A (NO in step S293), the process moves to step S295.
　ステップＳ２９４において、端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を当該端末装置３００の所持者に依頼するためのメンテナンス依頼情報を、当該端末装置３００に備えられた表示部３１０に表示する。 In step S294, the display control unit 330 provided in the terminal device 300 displays maintenance request information for requesting the owner of the terminal device 300 to perform maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring moving object 100A. displayed on the display section 310.
　ステップＳ２９５において、端末装置３００に備えられた制御部３１４は、メンテナンス作業の依頼が端末装置３００の所持者によって拒否されたか否かを判定する。メンテナンス作業の依頼の拒否は、表示部３１０に表示される操作画面が端末装置３００の所持者によって操作されることによって行われ得る。メンテナンス作業の依頼が端末装置３００の所持者によって拒否されなかった場合（ステップＳ２９５においてＮＯ）には、図４５に示す処理が完了する。メンテナンス作業の依頼が端末装置３００の所持者によって拒否された場合（ステップＳ２９５においてＹＥＳ）には、ステップＳ２９６に遷移する。 In step S295, the control unit 314 provided in the terminal device 300 determines whether the request for maintenance work has been rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300. The request for maintenance work may be rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300 operating the operation screen displayed on the display unit 310. If the request for maintenance work is not rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300 (NO in step S295), the process shown in FIG. 45 is completed. If the request for maintenance work is rejected by the owner of the terminal device 300 (YES in step S295), the process moves to step S296.
　ステップＳ２９６において、端末装置３００に備えられた提供部３２６は、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対するメンテナンス作業を委託するための要メンテナンス情報と、不具合内容情報とを、非基地局介在無線通信により他の端末装置３００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ２９７に遷移する。 In step S296, the providing unit 326 provided in the terminal device 300 transmits the maintenance required information for entrusting the maintenance work to the maintenance required mobile object 100A and the defect content information to other terminals via non-base station mediated wireless communication. The information is provided to the device 300. After this, the process moves to step S297.
　ステップＳ２９７において、他の端末装置３００に備えられた表示制御部３３０は、不具合内容情報と、メンテナンスメンバーが対応可能なメンテナンス作業を示す対応可能作業情報とに更に基づいて、要メンテナンス情報に応じた表示情報を当該他の端末装置３００に備えられた他の表示部３１０に表示する。こうして、図４５に示す処理が完了する。 In step S297, the display control unit 330 provided in the other terminal device 300 displays the information according to the maintenance required information based on the defect content information and the available work information indicating the maintenance work that the maintenance member can handle. The display information is displayed on another display section 310 provided in the other terminal device 300. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 45 is completed.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、受付部３１５が備えられ得る。受付部３１５は、当該端末装置３００を所持するメンテナンスメンバーによって行われたメンテナンス作業に関する記録であるメンテナンス記録（作業記録）の入力を受け付け得る。メンテナンス記録には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してメンテナンス作業を行った者に関する情報が含まれ得る。メンテナンス記録には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対して行われたメンテナンス作業の日時を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス記録には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対して行われたメンテナンス作業の内容を示す情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス記録には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業において当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに装着した部品（使用部品）に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス記録には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業に要した時間に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス記録には、当該メンテナンスに関する申し送り事項等も含まれ得る。なお、メンテナンス記録は、これらに限定されない。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the reception section 315. The reception unit 315 can receive an input of a maintenance record (work record) that is a record regarding maintenance work performed by a maintenance member who owns the terminal device 300. The maintenance record may include information regarding the person who performed maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. The maintenance record may include information indicating the date and time of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance record may include information indicating the content of maintenance work performed on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance record may include information regarding parts (used parts) mounted on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance record may include information regarding the time required for maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance record may also include matters related to the maintenance. Note that maintenance records are not limited to these.
　上述したように、端末装置３００には、メンテナンス記録提供部３２８が備えられ得る。メンテナンス記録提供部３２８は、受付部３１５によって受け付けられたメンテナンス記録を管理装置４００に提供し得る。 As described above, the terminal device 300 may be equipped with the maintenance record providing unit 328. The maintenance record providing unit 328 can provide the management device 400 with the maintenance record accepted by the accepting unit 315.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、取得部４４６が備えられ得る。取得部４４６は、端末装置３００から提供されるメンテナンス記録を取得し得る。取得部４４６は、取得したメンテナンス記録をメンテナンス履歴記憶部４３４に記憶し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the acquisition unit 446. The acquisition unit 446 can acquire maintenance records provided from the terminal device 300. The acquisition unit 446 can store the acquired maintenance records in the maintenance history storage unit 434.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、作業評価部４４８が備えられ得る。作業評価部４４８は、当該メンテナンス作業に関する記録であるメンテナンス記録と、当該メンテナンス作業の結果とに基づいて、当該メンテナンス作業に対する評価を示す情報である作業評価情報を生成し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the work evaluation section 448. The work evaluation unit 448 can generate work evaluation information that is information indicating an evaluation of the maintenance work based on a maintenance record that is a record regarding the maintenance work and the result of the maintenance work.
　メンテナンス作業の結果は、例えば、一の移動体１００に対して行われた当該メンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの期間に基づいて把握され得る。一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの期間は、例えば、当該一の移動体１００のメンテナンス履歴に基づいて把握され得る。 The result of the maintenance work can be determined, for example, based on the period until the one mobile object 100 again requires the same maintenance work as the maintenance work performed on the one mobile object 100. The period until the one moving body 100 requires maintenance work of the same content as the one maintenance work performed on the one moving body 100 is determined based on the maintenance history of the one moving body 100, for example. It can be understood that
　また、メンテナンス作業の結果は、例えば、一の移動体１００に対して行われた当該メンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの当該一の移動体１００の走行距離に基づいて把握され得る。一の移動体１００に対して行われた一のメンテナンス作業と同じ内容のメンテナンス作業を当該一の移動体１００が再び要するに至るまでの当該一の移動体１００の走行距離は、例えば、当該一の移動体１００の利用履歴に基づいて把握され得る。 In addition, the results of the maintenance work are, for example, the results of the maintenance work performed on the one mobile body 100 until the same maintenance work as the maintenance work performed on the one mobile body 100 is required again. It can be determined based on mileage. For example, the distance traveled by the moving object 100 until the moving object 100 requires the same maintenance work as the maintenance work performed on the moving object 100 is, for example, This can be determined based on the usage history of the mobile object 100.
　上述したように、作業評価部４４８は、メンテナンス記録と、メンテナンス作業の結果とに基づいて、当該メンテナンス作業に対する評価を示す作業評価情報を生成し得る。上述したように、メンテナンス記録には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業において当該要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに装着した部品（使用部品）に関する情報が含まれ得る。また、メンテナンス記録には、要メンテナンス移動体１００Ａに対してのメンテナンス作業に要した時間に関する情報が含まれ得る。即ち、メンテナンス記録には、当該メンテナンス作業におけるコストを示す情報が含まれ得る。従って、作業評価部４４８は、当該メンテナンス作業におけるコストを示す情報と、当該メンテナンス作業の結果とに基づいて、当該メンテナンス作業に対しての作業評価情報を生成し得る。 As described above, the work evaluation unit 448 can generate work evaluation information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work based on the maintenance record and the result of the maintenance work. As described above, the maintenance record may include information regarding parts (used parts) mounted on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A during maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. Furthermore, the maintenance record may include information regarding the time required for maintenance work on the maintenance-requiring mobile object 100A. That is, the maintenance record may include information indicating the cost of the maintenance work. Therefore, the work evaluation unit 448 can generate work evaluation information for the maintenance work based on information indicating the cost of the maintenance work and the results of the maintenance work.
　作業評価部４４８は、当該作業評価部４４８が生成した作業評価情報を、メンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部４３２等に記憶し得る。 The work evaluation unit 448 may store the work evaluation information generated by the work evaluation unit 448 in the maintenance member information storage unit 432 or the like.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、作業標準生成部４５０が備えられ得る。作業標準生成部４５０は、作業評価情報によって示される評価が評価基準以上であるメンテナンス作業を作業標準として採用し得る。例えば、コストが比較的低いにもかかわらず比較的高い耐久性が得られるメンテナンス作業は、作業評価が比較的高い。一方、コストが比較的高いにもかかわらず耐久性が比較的低いメンテナンス作業は、作業評価が比較的低い。コストが比較的低いにもかかわらず比較的高い耐久性が得られるメンテナンス作業は、作業標準として採用され得る。コストが比較的高いにもかかわらず耐久性が比較的低いメンテナンス作業は、作業標準として採用されない。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the work standard generation unit 450. The work standard generation unit 450 can adopt, as a work standard, maintenance work for which the evaluation indicated by the work evaluation information is equal to or higher than the evaluation standard. For example, maintenance work that provides relatively high durability despite being relatively low in cost has a relatively high work evaluation. On the other hand, maintenance work that has a relatively high cost but relatively low durability has a relatively low work evaluation. Maintenance operations that provide relatively high durability at relatively low cost may be adopted as a standard of practice. Maintenance tasks that have relatively high cost but relatively low durability are not adopted as standard practice.
　作業標準生成部４５０は、地域に応じた作業標準を生成し得る。例えば、塩害が生じやすい地域で用いられる移動体１００に対しては、防錆処理が充分に施された部品を選択することが作業標準とされ得る。塩害が生じやすい地域で当該移動体１００が用いられたか否かは、例えば、当該移動体１００に関する利用履歴に基づいて把握され得る。例えば、坂道が多い地域で用いられる移動体１００に対しては、耐久性が充分に高いブレーキパッドを選択することが作業標準とされ得る。坂道が多い地域で当該移動体１００が用いられたか否かは、例えば、当該移動体１００に関する利用履歴に基づいて把握され得る。 The work standard generation unit 450 can generate work standards according to the region. For example, for the moving body 100 used in areas prone to salt damage, it may be a standard work to select parts that have been sufficiently rust-proofed. Whether or not the mobile object 100 is used in an area prone to salt damage can be determined based on the usage history of the mobile object 100, for example. For example, for the moving body 100 used in an area with many slopes, it may be a standard practice to select brake pads with sufficiently high durability. Whether or not the mobile object 100 is used in an area with many slopes can be determined based on the usage history of the mobile object 100, for example.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、メンバー評価部４２２が備えられ得る。メンバー評価部４２２は、メンテナンスメンバーに対する評価を示すメンバー評価情報を、上述した作業評価情報に基づいて生成し得る。作業評価情報は、上述したように、メンテナンス作業に対する評価を示す情報である。メンバー評価部４２２は、例えば、作業評価情報における評価の高さに応じてメンバー評価の高さを決定し得るが、これに限定されない。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the member evaluation section 422. The member evaluation unit 422 can generate member evaluation information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance member based on the above-mentioned work evaluation information. As described above, the work evaluation information is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work. For example, the member evaluation unit 422 can determine the level of member evaluation according to the level of evaluation in the work evaluation information, but is not limited thereto.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、報酬決定部４５１が備えられ得る。報酬決定部４５１は、メンバー評価部４２２によって生成されるメンバー評価情報に基づいてメンテナンスメンバーの報酬を決定し得る。報酬決定部４５１は、例えば、メンバー評価情報における評価の高さに応じて報酬の高さを決定し得るが、これに限定されない。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the remuneration determining unit 451. The remuneration determination unit 451 may determine the remuneration of the maintenance member based on the member evaluation information generated by the member evaluation unit 422. For example, the remuneration determination unit 451 can determine the height of the remuneration according to the evaluation level in the member evaluation information, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、作業標準情報提供部４５２が備えられ得る。作業標準情報提供部４５２は、作業標準に関する情報を提供し得る。より具体的には、作業標準情報提供部４５２は、当該作業標準に関する情報を、メンテナンスメンバーではない者に対して例えば有償で提供し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may include the work standard information providing unit 452. The work standard information providing unit 452 can provide information regarding work standards. More specifically, the work standard information providing unit 452 may provide information regarding the work standard to those who are not maintenance members, for example, for a fee.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、対価決定部４５４が備えられ得る。対価決定部４５４は、作業標準情報提供部４５２によって提供される情報の対価を、作業標準情報提供部４５２によって提供される情報のデータ量に応じて決定し得る。当該情報のデータ量が比較的大きい場合には、当該情報の提供に対する対価は比較的高く設定され得る。また、対価決定部４５４は、作業標準情報提供部４５２によって提供される情報の対価を、作業標準情報提供部４５２によって提供される情報を生成するために要したデータ量に応じて決定し得る。当該情報を生成するために要したデータ量が比較的大きい場合には、当該情報の提供に対する対価は比較的高く設定され得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the consideration determination unit 454. The compensation determination unit 454 can determine the compensation for the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452 according to the data amount of the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452. When the data amount of the information is relatively large, the compensation for providing the information can be set relatively high. Further, the consideration determining unit 454 can determine the consideration for the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452 according to the amount of data required to generate the information provided by the work standard information providing unit 452. If the amount of data required to generate the information is relatively large, the price for providing the information can be set relatively high.
　図４６は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ３０１において、端末装置３００に備えられた受付部３１５は、メンテナンスメンバーによって行われたメンテナンス作業に関する記録であるメンテナンス記録の入力を受け付ける。この後、ステップＳ３０２に遷移する。 In step S301, the receiving unit 315 provided in the terminal device 300 receives input of a maintenance record that is a record regarding maintenance work performed by a maintenance member. After this, the process moves to step S302.
　ステップＳ３０２において、端末装置３００に備えられたメンテナンス記録提供部３２８は、受付部３１５によって受け付けられたメンテナンス記録を管理装置４００に提供する。この後、ステップＳ３０３に遷移する。 In step S302, the maintenance record providing unit 328 provided in the terminal device 300 provides the management device 400 with the maintenance record accepted by the receiving unit 315. After this, the process moves to step S303.
　ステップＳ３０３において、管理装置４００に備えられた作業評価部４４８は、メンテナンス記録と、メンテナンス作業の結果とに基づいて、メンテナンス作業に対する評価である作業評価を行う。こうして、図４６に示す処理が完了する。 In step S303, the work evaluation unit 448 provided in the management device 400 performs work evaluation, which is an evaluation of the maintenance work, based on the maintenance record and the results of the maintenance work. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 46 is completed.
　このように、本実施形態によれば、メンテナンス記録と、メンテナンス作業の結果とに基づいて、メンテナンス作業に対する評価を示す情報である作業評価情報が生成され得る。作業評価情報は、作業標準の設定に利用され得る。作業標準の設定は、移動体１００の良好な管理に寄与し得る。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, work evaluation information, which is information indicating the evaluation of the maintenance work, can be generated based on the maintenance record and the results of the maintenance work. Work evaluation information can be used to set work standards. Setting work standards can contribute to good management of the mobile body 100.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、制御部２１４が備えられ得る。制御部２１４は、移動体１００に生じている不具合の内容を示す情報である不具合内容情報の提供の対象となる移動体１００の識別情報を取得し得る。移動体１００の識別情報の取得は、移動体１００に備えられた情報提示部１１０によって提示される識別情報が、携帯端末２００によって読み取られることによって行われ得るが、これに限定されない。例えば、携帯端末２００に表示された入力画面がユーザによって操作されることによって、移動体１００の識別情報の入力が行われてもよい。制御部２１４は、こうして取得される識別情報を管理装置４００に提供し得る。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may include the control unit 214. The control unit 214 can acquire identification information of the mobile body 100 to which malfunction content information, which is information indicating the content of the malfunction occurring in the mobile body 100, is provided. The identification information of the mobile object 100 may be acquired by the mobile terminal 200 reading the identification information presented by the information presentation unit 110 provided in the mobile object 100, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the identification information of the mobile object 100 may be input by the user operating an input screen displayed on the mobile terminal 200. The control unit 214 can provide the management device 400 with the identification information acquired in this way.
　上述したように、管理装置４００には、移動体情報記憶部４２８が備えられ得る。上述したように、移動体情報記憶部４２８には、各々の移動体１００に関する情報である移動体情報が記憶され得る。上述したように、移動体情報には、当該移動体１００に生じている不具合の内容を示す不具合内容情報が含まれ得る。管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、携帯端末２００から提供された識別情報に対応する移動体１００に関する不具合内容情報を移動体情報記憶部４２８から取得し得る。制御部４０８は、当該不具合内容情報を携帯端末２００に供給し得る。 As described above, the management device 400 may be equipped with the mobile information storage section 428. As described above, the mobile body information storage unit 428 may store mobile body information that is information regarding each mobile body 100. As described above, the mobile object information may include defect content information indicating the details of the problem occurring in the mobile object 100. The control unit 408 included in the management device 400 can acquire defect content information regarding the mobile unit 100 corresponding to the identification information provided from the mobile terminal 200 from the mobile unit information storage unit 428. The control unit 408 can supply the defect content information to the mobile terminal 200.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、情報提供部２２８が備えられ得る。情報提供部２２８は、移動体１００に対応する不具合内容情報をユーザに提供し得る。情報提供部２２８は、携帯端末２００に備えられた表示部２１０に不具合内容情報を表示し得るが、これに限定されない。情報提供部２２８は、音声によって不具合情報をユーザに提供してもよい。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the information providing section 228. The information providing unit 228 can provide the user with defect content information corresponding to the mobile object 100. The information providing unit 228 may display the defect content information on the display unit 210 provided in the mobile terminal 200, but is not limited thereto. The information providing unit 228 may provide defect information to the user by voice.
　図４７は、表示画面の例を示す図である。不具合内容情報が表示画面２３０に表示されている状態の例が図４７には示されている。表示制御部２２６は、表示部２１０に表示画面２３０を表示し得る。表示制御部２２６は、画像取得部２２４によって取得された画像を表示画面２３０に表示し得る。不具合内容情報の提供の対象となる移動体１００が当該画像に含まれている場合、表示制御部２２６は、当該移動体１００に対応する不具合内容情報に応じた図形（記号、マーク）２３２を当該移動体１００に重畳表示し得る。かかる図形２３２は、例えば、不具合が生じている部品を囲む丸、楕円等であってもよいが、これに限定されない。かかる図形２３２は、不具合が生じている部品の外形に応じた図形であってもよい。表示制御部２２６は、かかる図形２３２を表示するとともに、不具合の内容を示す文字情報２３３も表示画面２３０に表示し得る。 FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen. FIG. 47 shows an example of a state in which defect content information is displayed on the display screen 230. The display control unit 226 can display a display screen 230 on the display unit 210. The display control unit 226 can display the image acquired by the image acquisition unit 224 on the display screen 230. If the image includes the moving object 100 for which defect content information is to be provided, the display control unit 226 displays a figure (symbol, mark) 232 according to the defect content information corresponding to the moving object 100. It can be displayed superimposed on the moving body 100. The figure 232 may be, for example, a circle or an ellipse surrounding the defective component, but is not limited thereto. The graphic 232 may be a graphic corresponding to the outer shape of the component in which the problem occurs. The display control unit 226 can display the graphic 232 and also display text information 233 indicating the content of the problem on the display screen 230.
　上述したように、携帯端末２００には、受付部２１６が備えられ得る。受付部２１６は、移動体１００に生じている不具合の内容に関する情報である不具合内容情報の入力を受け付け得る。不具合内容情報の入力は、当該携帯端末２００を所持するユーザによって行われ得る。不具合内容情報の入力は、例えば、当該移動体１００を利用したユーザによって行われ得るが、これに限定されない。不具合の内容としては、例えば、サドルが汚れていることが挙げられ得る。また、不具合の内容として、サドルの高さの調整が困難であることが挙げられ得る。また、不具合の内容として、サドルが故障していることが挙げられ得る。また、不具合の内容として、タイヤの空気圧が低いことが挙げられ得る。また、不具合の内容として、タイヤのパンクが挙げられ得る。また、不具合の内容として、ブレーキから異音が生じることが挙げられ得る。また、不具合の内容として、ブレーキの効きが悪いことが挙げられる。また、不具合の内容として、ブレーキが効かないことが挙げられ得る。なお、不具合の内容はこれらに限定されない。 As described above, the mobile terminal 200 may be equipped with the reception section 216. The reception unit 216 can receive input of malfunction content information that is information regarding the content of a malfunction occurring in the mobile object 100. The defect content information may be input by a user who owns the mobile terminal 200. The malfunction content information may be input by, for example, a user using the mobile object 100, but is not limited thereto. The problem may include, for example, that the saddle is dirty. Further, the problem may include difficulty in adjusting the height of the saddle. Furthermore, the content of the malfunction may include that the saddle is out of order. Furthermore, the problem may include low tire air pressure. Moreover, the content of the malfunction may include a tire blowout. Furthermore, the problem may include abnormal noises coming from the brakes. In addition, the details of the malfunction include poor brake effectiveness. Moreover, the content of the malfunction may include that the brakes do not work. Note that the contents of the malfunction are not limited to these.
　上述したように、管理装置４００に備えられた記憶部４０４には、移動体情報記憶部４２８が備えられ得る。移動体情報記憶部４２８には、移動体情報が記憶され得る。上述したように、移動体情報には、不具合内容情報が含まれ得る。携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６によって受け付けられた不具合内容情報は、携帯端末２００から管理装置４００に提供され得る。管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、携帯端末２００に備えられた受付部２１６によって受け付けられた不具合内容情報に基づいて、記憶部４０４に記憶された不具合内容情報を更新し得る。より具体的には、制御部４０８は、受付部２１６によって受け付けられた不具合内容情報に基づいて、移動体情報記憶部４２８に記憶された不具合内容情報を更新し得る。管理装置４００には、上述したように、予約受付部４１０が備えられ得る。予約受付部４１０は、移動体１００の利用予約を不具合内容情報に基づいて制限し得る。 As described above, the storage unit 404 provided in the management device 400 may include the mobile information storage unit 428. Mobile object information can be stored in the mobile object information storage section 428. As described above, the mobile object information may include defect content information. The defect content information received by the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200 can be provided from the mobile terminal 200 to the management device 400. The control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 can update the defect content information stored in the storage unit 404 based on the defect content information received by the reception unit 216 provided in the mobile terminal 200. More specifically, the control unit 408 can update the malfunction content information stored in the mobile object information storage unit 428 based on the malfunction content information accepted by the receiving unit 216. The management device 400 may be equipped with the reservation reception section 410, as described above. The reservation accepting unit 410 can limit reservations for use of the mobile object 100 based on the defect content information.
　図４８は、本実施形態による管理システムの動作の例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the management system according to this embodiment.
　ステップＳ３１１において、携帯端末２００に備えられた制御部２１４は、不具合内容情報の提供の対象となる移動体１００の識別情報を取得する。この後、ステップＳ３１２に遷移する。 In step S311, the control unit 214 provided in the mobile terminal 200 acquires the identification information of the mobile object 100 to which the defect content information is to be provided. After this, the process moves to step S312.
　ステップＳ３１２において、制御部２１４は、不具合内容情報の提供の対象となる移動体１００の識別情報を管理装置４００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ３１３に遷移する。 In step S312, the control unit 214 supplies the management device 400 with the identification information of the mobile object 100 to which the defect content information is to be provided. After this, the process moves to step S313.
　ステップＳ３１３において、管理装置４００に備えられた制御部４０８は、当該識別情報に応じた不具合内容情報を移動体情報記憶部４２８から読み出す。この後、ステップＳ３１４に遷移する。 In step S313, the control unit 408 provided in the management device 400 reads defect content information corresponding to the identification information from the mobile object information storage unit 428. After this, the process moves to step S314.
　ステップＳ３１４において、制御部４０８は、当該不具合内容情報を携帯端末２００に供給する。この後、ステップＳ３１５に遷移する。 In step S314, the control unit 408 supplies the defect content information to the mobile terminal 200. After this, the process moves to step S315.
　ステップＳ３１５において、携帯端末２００に備えられた情報提供部２２８は、当該携帯端末２００を所持するユーザに不具合内容情報を提供する。こうして、図４８に示す処理が完了する。 In step S315, the information providing unit 228 provided in the mobile terminal 200 provides malfunction content information to the user who owns the mobile terminal 200. In this way, the process shown in FIG. 48 is completed.
　このように、本実施形態によれば、移動体１００に関する不具合内容情報が提供され得るため、当該移動体１００を利用するか否かの判断を、当該移動体１００の利用を開始する前にユーザが行い得る。本実施形態によれば、ユーザの便宜に資することができる。 In this way, according to the present embodiment, malfunction content information regarding the mobile object 100 can be provided, so that the user can decide whether or not to use the mobile object 100 before starting to use the mobile object 100. can be done. According to this embodiment, it is possible to contribute to user convenience.
　［変形実施形態］
　本発明は、上述した実施形態に限らず、本発明の要旨を逸脱することなく、種々の構成を採り得る。 [Modified embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and can take various configurations without departing from the gist of the present invention.
　例えば、上記実施形態では、判定部４１６が管理装置４００に備えられている場合を例に説明したが、これに限定されない。例えば、判定部４１６が携帯端末２００に備えられていてもよい。 For example, in the above embodiment, the case where the determination unit 416 is included in the management device 400 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination unit 416 may be included in the mobile terminal 200.
　また、上記実施形態では、位置姿勢適否判定部４２５が管理装置４００に備えられている場合を例に説明したが、これに限定されない。例えば、位置姿勢適否判定部４２５が端末装置３００に備えられていてもよい。 Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the position/posture suitability determination unit 425 is provided in the management device 400 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position/orientation suitability determination unit 425 may be included in the terminal device 300.
　また、上記実施形態では、作業状態適否判定部４２４が管理装置４００に備えられている場合を例に説明したが、これに限定されない。例えば、作業状態適否判定部４２４が端末装置３００に備えられていてもよい。 Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the work state suitability determination unit 424 is provided in the management device 400 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the work state suitability determination unit 424 may be included in the terminal device 300.
　また、上記実施形態では、作業情報記憶部４３３が管理装置４００に備えられている場合を例に説明したが、これに限定されない。例えば、作業情報記憶部４３３が端末装置３００に備えられていてもよい。 Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the work information storage section 433 is provided in the management device 400 has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the work information storage section 433 may be included in the terminal device 300.
　上記の実施形態から把握し得る発明について、以下に記載する。 The inventions that can be understood from the above embodiments are described below.
　管理システム（１０）は、ユーザによってシェアされる移動体（１００）を管理する管理システムであって、管理区域（３５０）を設定する設定部（４４０）と、前記移動体に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点（３５２）が、前記管理区域内に略均等に配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の位置を決定する決定部（４４２）と、を備える。このような構成によれば、メンテナンス作業の提供を受けるための移動体の移動距離が過度に長くなるのを防止し得る。 The management system (10) is a management system for managing a mobile object (100) shared by users, and includes a setting section (440) for setting a management area (350) and a maintenance work for the mobile object. and a determination unit (442) that determines the location of the service bases so that the service bases (352), which are bases that provide services, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the moving distance of the moving object from becoming excessively long in order to receive maintenance work.
　上記の管理システムにおいて、前記決定部は、前記管理区域におけるメンテナンス需要に基づいて、前記管理区域内における前記サービス拠点の数を決定してもよい。このような構成によれば、移動体のメンテナンスを良好に行い得る。 In the above management system, the determining unit may determine the number of service bases within the management area based on maintenance demand in the management area. According to such a configuration, maintenance of the moving body can be performed satisfactorily.
　上記の管理システムにおいて、前記決定部は、前記サービス拠点の対応可能業務に基づいて、各々の前記サービス拠点の前記位置を決定してもよい。 In the above management system, the determining unit may determine the location of each service base based on the services that the service base can handle.
　上記の管理システムにおいて、前記決定部は、前記サービス拠点の稼働時間に基づいて、各々の前記サービス拠点の前記位置を決定してもよい。このような構成によれば、メンテナンス作業の提供を受け得ない時間を短縮し得る。 In the above management system, the determining unit may determine the location of each service base based on the operating hours of the service base. According to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the time during which maintenance work cannot be provided.
　上記の管理システムにおいて、前記決定部は、前記管理区域のうちの標高が相対的に低い箇所である低標高箇所（３５０Ｌ）に前記サービス拠点が少なくとも配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の前記位置を決定してもよい。 In the above management system, the determining unit determines the location of the service base so that the service base is located at least at a low elevation location (350L) that is a relatively low elevation location in the management area. may be determined.
　上記の管理システムにおいて、前記ユーザによって所持される携帯端末を更に備え、前記サービス拠点の稼働に偏りが生じた場合に、送客のための情報を前記携帯端末に配信することにより、前記稼働の偏りを是正する是正部（４４４）を更に備えてもよい。 The above management system further includes a mobile terminal owned by the user, and when the operation of the service base is uneven, information for customer referral is distributed to the mobile terminal to improve the operation. It may further include a correction unit (444) for correcting bias.
　管理方法は、ユーザによってシェアされる移動体を管理する管理方法であって、管理区域を設定するステップ（Ｓ２２１）と、前記移動体に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点が、前記管理区域内に略均等に配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の位置を決定するステップ（Ｓ２２２）と、を有する。 The management method is a management method for managing mobile bodies shared by users, and includes a step of setting a management area (S221), and a service base that is a base that provides maintenance work for the mobile body. determining the positions of the service bases so that they are approximately evenly distributed within the management area (S222).
１０：管理システム　　　　　　　　　１２：シェアリングシステム
２２：貸し出しポート　　　　　　　　２３：基地局
２４：ネットワーク　　　　　　　　　２９：管理センタ
３０：管理機　　　　　　　　　　　　３８：ポートロック機構
１００：移動体　　　　　　　　　　　１００Ａ：要メンテナンス移動体
１００Ｂ：利用可能移動体
１０２、２０２、２０２Ａ、３０２、４０２：演算部
１０４、２０４、２０４Ａ、３０４、４０４：記憶部
１０５、２０５、３１１：測位部　　　１０６：ロック機構
１０８：バッテリ　　　　　　　　　　１１０：情報提示部
１１１：移動体間通信部
１１２、２１２、２１２Ａ、３１２、４０６：通信部
１１４、２１４、２１４Ａ、３１４、４０８：制御部
１１６：利用制限情報取得部　　　　　１１８：利用制限部
１２２：予約移管部　　　　　　　　　１２４、３２９：位置情報取得部
１２６：認証部　　　　　　　　　　　１２８：データ取得部
２００：携帯端末　　　　　　　　　　２００Ａ：携帯通信端末
２０６、２０６Ａ、３０６：撮像部　　２０８、２０８Ａ、３０８：操作部
２１０、２１０Ａ、３１０：表示部　　２１６、３１５：受付部
２１８：利用制限情報提供部
２２０：要メンテナンス移動体情報提供部
２２２：要メンテナンス情報提供部
２２４、３２２：画像取得部　　　　　２２５：不具合内容判定部
２２６、２２６Ａ、３３０：表示制御部
２２７、４１６：判定部　　　　　　　２２８：情報提供部
２３０、３３２、３４４：表示画面
２３２、３３８、３３８Ｂ、３３８Ｇ、３３８Ｐ、３３８Ｖ、３３８Ｙ、３４２、３４６：図形
２３３、３４０、３４８：文字情報　　３００：端末装置
３１６：報酬情報入力受付部　　　　　３１７：入力受付部
３１８：完了情報受付部　　　　　　　３２０：受託情報供給部
３２４：音声情報提供部　　　　　　　３２６：提供部
３２８：メンテナンス記録提供部　　　３３１：可否判定部
３３４：地図　　　　　　　　　　　　３３６：情報
３５０：管理区域　　　　　　　　　　３５０Ｌ：低標高箇所
３５２：サービス拠点　　　　　　　　３５２Ａ：高度サービス拠点
３５２Ｂ：非高度サービス拠点　　　　３５２Ｃ：長時間サービス拠点
３５２Ｄ：短時間サービス拠点　　　　４００：管理装置
４１０：予約受付部　　　　　　　　　４１２：推定部
４１４：要メンテナンス情報配信部　　４１７：移動体判定部
４１８：通知部　　　　　　　　　　　４２０：選定部
４２２：メンバー評価部　　　　　　　４２３：処理部
４２４：作業状態適否判定部　　　　　４２５：位置姿勢適否判定部
４２６：ユーザ情報記憶部　　　　　　４２８：移動体情報記憶部
４３０：予約情報記憶部
４３２：メンテナンスメンバー情報記憶部
４３３：作業情報記憶部　　　　　　　４３４：メンテナンス履歴記憶部
４３６：利用履歴記憶部　　　　　　　４３８：地図情報記憶部
４４０：設定部　　　　　　　　　　　４４２：決定部
４４４：是正部　　　　　　　　　　　４４５：インセンティブ付与部
４４６：取得部　　　　　　　　　　　４４８：作業評価部
４５０：作業標準生成部　　　　　　　４５１：報酬決定部
４５２：作業標準情報提供部　　　　　４５４：対価決定部
４５６：情報提供者評価部 10: Management system 12: Sharing system 22: Rental port 23: Base station 24: Network 29: Management center 30: Management machine 38: Port lock mechanism 100: Mobile object 100A: Mobile object requiring maintenance 100B: Available mobile object 102 , 202, 202A, 302, 402: Arithmetic unit 104, 204, 204A, 304, 404: Storage unit 105, 205, 311: Positioning unit 106: Lock mechanism 108: Battery 110: Information presentation unit 111: Inter-mobile communication unit 112, 212, 212A, 312, 406: Communication section 114, 214, 214A, 314, 408: Control section 116: Usage restriction information acquisition section 118: Usage restriction section 122: Reservation transfer section 124, 329: Location information acquisition section 126 : Authentication unit 128: Data acquisition unit 200: Mobile terminal 200A: Mobile communication terminal 206, 206A, 306: Imaging unit 208, 208A, 308: Operation unit 210, 210A, 310: Display unit 216, 315: Reception unit 218: Usage Restriction information providing unit 220: Maintenance required moving object information providing unit 222: Maintenance required information providing unit 224, 322: Image acquisition unit 225: Malfunction content determination unit 226, 226A, 330: Display control unit 227, 416: Determination unit 228: Information providing units 230, 332, 344: Display screens 232, 338, 338B, 338G, 338P, 338V, 338Y, 342, 346: Graphics 233, 340, 348: Character information 300: Terminal device 316: Reward information input reception unit 317 : Input reception unit 318: Completion information reception unit 320: Commissioned information supply unit 324: Voice information provision unit 326: Provision unit 328: Maintenance record provision unit 331: Possibility determination unit 334: Map 336: Information 350: Management area 350L: Low Altitude location 352: Service base 352A: Advanced service base 352B: Non-advanced service base 352C: Long time service base 352D: Short time service base 400: Management device 410: Reservation reception unit 412: Estimation unit 414: Maintenance required information distribution unit 417 : Mobile body determination unit 418: Notification unit 420: Selection unit 422: Member evaluation unit 423: Processing unit 424: Work state suitability determination unit 425: Position/posture suitability determination unit 426: User information storage unit 428: Mobile body information storage unit 430 : Reservation information storage section 432: Maintenance member information storage section 433: Work information storage section 434: Maintenance history storage section 436: Usage history storage section 438: Map information storage section 440: Setting section 442: Determination section 444: Correction section 445: Incentive grant unit 446: Acquisition unit 448: Work evaluation unit 450: Work standard generation unit 451: Remuneration determination unit 452: Work standard information provision unit 454: Consideration determination unit 456: Information provider evaluation unit

Claims (7)

  1. 　ユーザによってシェアされる移動体（１００）を管理する管理システム（１０）であって、
    　管理区域（３５０）を設定する設定部（４４０）と、
    　前記移動体に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点（３５２）が、前記管理区域内に略均等に配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の位置を決定する決定部（４４２）と、
    　を備える、管理システム。     A management system (10) that manages a mobile object (100) shared by users, the management system (10) comprising:
    a setting section (440) for setting a management area (350);
    a determining unit (442) that determines the positions of the service bases so that the service bases (352), which are bases that provide maintenance work for the mobile objects, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area; ,
    A management system equipped with.
  2. 　請求項１に記載の管理システムにおいて、
    　前記決定部は、前記管理区域におけるメンテナンス需要に基づいて、前記管理区域内における前記サービス拠点の数を決定する、管理システム。     The management system according to claim 1,
    The management system, wherein the determining unit determines the number of service bases within the management area based on maintenance demand in the management area.
  3. 　請求項１に記載の管理システムにおいて、
    　前記決定部は、前記サービス拠点の対応可能業務に基づいて、各々の前記サービス拠点の前記位置を決定する、管理システム。     The management system according to claim 1,
    The determination unit is a management system that determines the location of each service base based on the services that the service base can handle.
  4. 　請求項１に記載の管理システムにおいて、
    　前記決定部は、前記サービス拠点の稼働時間に基づいて、各々の前記サービス拠点の前記位置を決定する、管理システム。     The management system according to claim 1,
    The management system, wherein the determining unit determines the location of each service base based on the operating hours of the service base.
  5. 　請求項１に記載の管理システムにおいて、
    　前記決定部は、前記管理区域のうちの標高が相対的に低い箇所である低標高箇所（３５０Ｌ）に前記サービス拠点が少なくとも配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の前記位置を決定する、管理システム。     The management system according to claim 1,
    The determination unit determines the position of the service base so that the service base is located at least at a low elevation location (350L) that is a relatively low elevation location in the management area. .
  6. 　請求項１～５のいずれか１項に記載の管理システムにおいて、
    　前記ユーザによって所持される携帯端末を更に備え、
    　前記サービス拠点の稼働に偏りが生じた場合に、送客のための情報を前記携帯端末に配信することにより、前記稼働の偏りを是正する是正部（４４４）を更に備える、管理システム。     The management system according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
    further comprising a mobile terminal owned by the user,
    A management system further comprising a correction unit (444) that corrects the imbalance in operation by distributing information for customer referral to the mobile terminal when an imbalance occurs in the operation of the service base.
  7. 　ユーザによってシェアされる移動体を管理する管理方法であって、
    　管理区域を設定するステップ（Ｓ２２１）と、
    　前記移動体に対してのメンテナンス作業を提供する拠点であるサービス拠点が、前記管理区域内に略均等に配置されるように、前記サービス拠点の位置を決定するステップ（Ｓ２２２）と、
    　を有する、管理方法。     A management method for managing mobile objects shared by users, the method comprising:
    a step of setting a management area (S221);
    determining the positions of the service bases so that the service bases, which are bases that provide maintenance work for the mobile object, are arranged approximately evenly within the management area (S222);
    A management method that has
PCT/JP2023/012370 2022-03-30 2023-03-28 Management system and management method WO2023190433A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2024512509A JPWO2023190433A1 (en) 2022-03-30 2023-03-28

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022054733 2022-03-30
JP2022-054733 2022-03-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023190433A1 true WO2023190433A1 (en) 2023-10-05

Family

ID=88202423

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/012370 WO2023190433A1 (en) 2022-03-30 2023-03-28 Management system and management method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2023190433A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2023190433A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016075808A1 (en) * 2014-11-14 2016-05-19 日産自動車株式会社 Shared vehicle management device and shared vehicle management method
JP2016151940A (en) * 2015-02-18 2016-08-22 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Operation plan creation assistance system for car sharing system
CN109102083A (en) * 2018-06-28 2018-12-28 深圳市轱辘汽车维修技术有限公司 A kind of the quantity configuration method and relevant device of maintenance of equipment
JP2019008660A (en) * 2017-06-27 2019-01-17 本田技研工業株式会社 Car sharing management system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016075808A1 (en) * 2014-11-14 2016-05-19 日産自動車株式会社 Shared vehicle management device and shared vehicle management method
JP2016151940A (en) * 2015-02-18 2016-08-22 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Operation plan creation assistance system for car sharing system
JP2019008660A (en) * 2017-06-27 2019-01-17 本田技研工業株式会社 Car sharing management system
CN109102083A (en) * 2018-06-28 2018-12-28 深圳市轱辘汽车维修技术有限公司 A kind of the quantity configuration method and relevant device of maintenance of equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2023190433A1 (en) 2023-10-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11232504B2 (en) Vehicle customization and personalization activities
US11132650B2 (en) Communication APIs for remote monitoring and control of vehicle systems
US10282708B2 (en) Service advisor accounts for remote service monitoring of a vehicle
US10872370B2 (en) Systems and methods for on-demand delivery of construction materials and other items
US9691045B1 (en) Roadside assistance management
RU2601837C2 (en) Vehicle control system
US20130311211A1 (en) Systems and methods for transportation services
US20160203435A1 (en) Systems and methods for managing a vehicle fleet
CN113886712B (en) ERP-based artificial intelligent automobile maintenance recommendation method, system and storage medium
Wang et al. Integrating passenger incentives to optimize routing for demand-responsive customized bus systems
Pizzuto et al. How China will help fuel the revolution in autonomous vehicles
WO2023190433A1 (en) Management system and management method
WO2023190432A1 (en) Management system and management method
WO2023190430A1 (en) Management system and management method
WO2023190434A1 (en) Management system and management method
WO2023190431A1 (en) Management system and management method
WO2023190436A1 (en) Management system and management method
WO2023190429A1 (en) Management system and management method
WO2023190435A1 (en) Management system and management method
JP2017016450A (en) Vehicle lending system, vehicle lending method, and management server
US11769119B1 (en) Autonomous car repair
JP7439335B1 (en) Management system, management method and management program
JP7475803B1 (en) Computer, method and program
JP7440693B1 (en) Management device, management method and management program
JP7463607B1 (en) Pointing device, pointing method, and pointing program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23780442

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2024512509

Country of ref document: JP